Horizon

CATEGORY 423INSTALLATION AND

CONFIGURATION

CATEGORY 523MAINTENANCEINFORMATION

CATEGORY 623PARTS INFORMATION

INDEXCATEGORY 323TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

20th Sep 02

Service Manual: Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2

68P02902W61-O

GMR-01GMR Page 1

Manual RevisionGMR-01

20th Sep 02

68P02902W61-O

GSM-209-020

Motorola manualaffected

This Manual Revision is applicable only to the manual number and version listedbelow:

68P02902W61-O Service Manual Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2

Service requests

This revision provides a fix to the following service requests:

N/A

Reason forrevision

This revision provides additional and updated information as follows:

Frontmatter page 10. Change of fibre optic bend radius from 30 mm to 60 mm.

Action

Remove and replace pages in the Manual as follows:

Remove Insert

All pages between the clearacetate front sheet and theblank backing sheet, removefrom binder.

All pages of the GMR betweenthe front sheet and the blankbacking sheet, insert into binder.

Destroy all obsolete pages. Do not destroy this page.

Insert this Manual Revision sheet in the front of the manual for future reference.

GSM-209-020

20th Sep 02GMR Page 2


GMR-0168P02902W61-O

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Including:68P02902W62-O68P02902W63-O68P02902W64-O68P02902W65-O

Horizonmicro2 andHorizoncompact2

GMR-01

Service ManualGSM-209-020

68P02902W61-O

GMR-01

68P02902W62-O68P02902W63-O68P02902W64-O68P02902W65-O

68P02902W61-O

Service M

anual

Ho

rizonm

icro2 an

dH

orizo

ncom

pact2

GS

M-209-020

GM

R-01

Horizonmicro2andHorizoncompact2

Including:

Pos

itin

mar

k fo

r TE

D s

pine

ServiceManual

20th Sep 02


68P02902W61-O

GMR-01i

GSM-209-020

Service ManualHorizonmicro2 and

Horizoncompact2

E Motorola 1999 � 2002All Rights ReservedPrinted in the U.K.

GSM-209-020

20th Sep 02ii


GMR-0168P02902W61-O

Copyrights, notices and trademarks

CopyrightsThe Motorola products described in this document may include copyrighted Motorola computerprograms stored in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in the United States and othercountries preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for copyright computer programs, including theexclusive right to copy or reproduce in any form the copyright computer program. Accordingly, anycopyright Motorola computer programs contained in the Motorola products described in this documentmay not be copied or reproduced in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola.Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or byimplication, estoppel or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications ofMotorola, except for the rights that arise by operation of law in the sale of a product.

RestrictionsThe software described in this document is the property of Motorola. It is furnished under a licenseagreement and may be used and/or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of the agreement.Software and documentation are copyright materials. Making unauthorized copies is prohibited bylaw. No part of the software or documentation may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, storedin a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form or by anymeans, without prior written permission of Motorola.

AccuracyWhile reasonable efforts have been made to assure the accuracy of this document, Motorolaassumes no liability resulting from any inaccuracies or omissions in this document, or from the useof the information obtained herein. Motorola reserves the right to make changes to any productsdescribed herein to improve reliability, function, or design, and reserves the right to revise thisdocument and to make changes from time to time in content hereof with no obligation to notify anyperson of revisions or changes. Motorola does not assume any liability arising out of the applicationor use of any product or circuit described herein; neither does it convey license under its patentrights of others.

Trademarks

and MOTOROLA are registered trademarks of Motorola Inc. Aspira, Intelligence Everywhere, M-Cell and Taskfinder are trademarks of Motorola Inc.All other brands and corporate names are trademarks of their respective owners.

GSM-209-020

20th Sep 02


68P02902W61-O

GMR-01iii

Contents

Issue status of this manual 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General information 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

First aid in case of electric shock 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Reporting safety issues 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Warnings and cautions 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General warnings 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General cautions 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Devices sensitive to static 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Motorola GSM manual set 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GMR amendment 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GMR amendment record 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Category 323Technical Description (Tech.) i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 1Introduction and specification of equipment i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction to the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 BTSs Tech. 1�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview Tech. 1�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software requirements Tech. 1�2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery backup Tech. 1�2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dual frequency support Tech. 1�2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frequency hopping Tech. 1�2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Links Tech. 1�2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Horizonmicro2 external view Tech. 1�3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Horizoncompact2 system Tech. 1�4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Specifications Tech. 1�5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approval and safety Tech. 1�5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Environmental limits Tech. 1�5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions Tech. 1�5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Weight Tech. 1�5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power requirements Tech. 1�6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery backup Tech. 1�6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power consumption Tech. 1�6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RF output power Tech. 1�7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frequency band characteristics Tech. 1�9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 2Equipment enclosures i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BTS enclosure Tech. 2�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of the BTS enclosure Tech. 2�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS modules location diagram Tech. 2�2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS components location diagram Tech. 2�3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GSM-209-020

20th Sep 02iv


GMR-0168P02902W61-O

Booster Tech. 2�4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of the booster Tech. 2�4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM900 booster diagram Tech. 2�4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DCS1800 booster diagram Tech. 2�5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 3Power supply system i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS power supply system Tech. 3�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview Tech. 3�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Components Tech. 3�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location diagram Tech. 3�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BTS power supply module Tech. 3�2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distribution board Tech. 3�2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power supply module Tech. 3�3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC power connections Tech. 3�4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC-DC PSM Tech. 3�5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power supply signals and interfaces Tech. 3�7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Events and alarms Tech. 3�8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Battery backup Tech. 3�9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose Tech. 3�9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description Tech. 3�9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery pack diagram Tech. 3�9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Booster power supply Tech. 3�10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of booster power supply Tech. 3�10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC supply socket connector Tech. 3�10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC power pin designations Tech. 3�11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC-DC BPSM Tech. 3�11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 4Digital modules i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital modules Tech. 4�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview of digital modules Tech. 4�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RDIS module Tech. 4�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DINO/RHINO module Tech. 4�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HDSL module Tech. 4�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line termination modules Tech. 4�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Main control unit, micro (MCU-m) Tech. 4�2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of MCU-m Tech. 4�2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Processor functionality Tech. 4�2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68LC060 processor Tech. 4�2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QUICC32 processor Tech. 4�3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MCU-m block diagram Tech. 4�3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PCMCIA interface Tech. 4�4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Crosspoint switch Tech. 4�4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sync block Tech. 4�4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MMI interface Tech. 4�5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronic board ID Tech. 4�5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronic site ID and calibration data Tech. 4�5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GSM-209-020

20th Sep 02


68P02902W61-O

GMR-01v

Olympus radio architecture controller (ORAC) function Tech. 4�6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of ORAC Tech. 4�6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ORAC functional blocks Tech. 4�6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TTY/SCI Tech. 4�7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ORAC functional diagram Tech. 4�7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DINO/RHINO module Tech. 4�8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of DINO/RHINO Tech. 4�8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of DINO/RHINO Tech. 4�8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module view of DINO/RHINO Tech. 4�9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DINO/RHINO functional diagram Tech. 4�10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Processing section of DINO/RHINO Tech. 4�11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reset switches Tech. 4�12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line interface framers Tech. 4�12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radio signalling links Tech. 4�13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HDSL interface Tech. 4�13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

High speed digital subscriber line (HDSL) module Tech. 4�14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of HDSL Tech. 4�14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description of HDSL Tech. 4�14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional diagram of HDSL Tech. 4�14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Line termination modules Tech. 4�15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of line termination modules Tech. 4�15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connector location diagram Tech. 4�15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminology for Tx and Rx Tech. 4�16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Features of line termination modules Tech. 4�16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HDSL link options Tech. 4�16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 5RF modules i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of RF modules Tech. 5�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction Tech. 5�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location diagram Tech. 5�2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Dual transceiver (DTRX) module Tech. 5�3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of DTRX module Tech. 5�3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Synthesizer section Tech. 5�3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Receiver section Tech. 5�5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmitter section Tech. 5�8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Temperature detectors Tech. 5�11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Non volatile storage of calibration data Tech. 5�11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Horizonmicro2 duplexer and combiner/isolator Tech. 5�12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of the duplexer and combiner/ isolator Tech. 5�12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of the duplexer and combiner/ isolator Tech. 5�12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplexer and combiner/ isolator diagrams Tech. 5�13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal Rx/Tx interconnections Tech. 5�13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Horizoncompact2 isolators Tech. 5�14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of the isolators Tech. 5�14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of the isolators Tech. 5�14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Isolator module view Tech. 5�15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal Rx/Tx interconnections Tech. 5�15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GSM-209-020

20th Sep 02vi


GMR-0168P02902W61-O

Booster Tech. 5�16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of the booster Tech. 5�16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Booster system description Tech. 5�17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description of booster Tech. 5�18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 6Heat management i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heat management of the BTS Tech. 6�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview of BTS heat management Tech. 6�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module heaters Tech. 6�2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Enclosure cooling Tech. 6�3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of enclosure cooling Tech. 6�3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram of finned heatsinks Tech. 6�3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Airflow within the enclosure Tech. 6�4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosure cooling overview Tech. 6�4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Airflow diagram Tech. 6�4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Booster heat management Tech. 6�5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of booster enclosure cooling Tech. 6�5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 7Expansion feature i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expansion feature Tech. 7�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Expansion feature overview Tech. 7�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dual band support Tech. 7�2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field replaceable units Tech. 7�2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration data Tech. 7�2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single band BTS configurations Tech. 7�3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dual band BTS configurations Tech. 7�3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Antenna options Tech. 7�4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software requirement Tech. 7�4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Category 423Installation & Configuration (Inst.) i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 1Site preparation i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation procedure overview Inst. 1�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installation procedure list Inst. 1�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Weight of delivered package Inst. 1�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tools and materials Inst. 1�2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to tools and materials Inst. 1�2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torque values Inst. 1�3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Site requirements and considerations Inst. 1�4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction Inst. 1�4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Environmental requirements Inst. 1�4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions Inst. 1�4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Weights Inst. 1�4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power specifications Inst. 1�5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software requirements Inst. 1�6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HDSL modems Inst. 1�6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structural requirements Inst. 1�6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Space requirements Inst. 1�6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Space requirements diagram Inst. 1�7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GSM-209-020

20th Sep 02


68P02902W61-O

GMR-01vii

Site visit safety and weather protection Inst. 1�8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to site safety Inst. 1�8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rubbish on site Inst. 1�8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On site safety Inst. 1�8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Weather conditions and maintenance cover Inst. 1�9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Earthing and transient protection Inst. 1�10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site earthing Inst. 1�10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E1 link transient and lightning protection Inst. 1�10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Earthing the site Inst. 1�11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to earthing the site Inst. 1�11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements Inst. 1�11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installation kit delivery and packaging Inst. 1�13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment delivery Inst. 1�13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation kit equipment Inst. 1�13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Unpacking the BTS installation kit Inst. 1�15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction Inst. 1�15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disposing of the packing material Inst. 1�15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Booster installation kit delivery and packaging Inst. 1�16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment delivery Inst. 1�16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation kit equipment Inst. 1�16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Unpacking the installation kit Inst. 1�19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction Inst. 1�19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disposing of the packing material Inst. 1�19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Mounting guidelines Inst. 1�20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to mounting guidelines Inst. 1�20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting guidelines Inst. 1�20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Example layouts Inst. 1�22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Mounting the BTS wall bracket Inst. 1�37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to mounting the wall bracket Inst. 1�37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools Inst. 1�37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the tools Inst. 1�38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drilling holes for the mounting bolts Inst. 1�38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wall mounting Inst. 1�39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pole mounting Inst. 1�41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Mounting the booster wall bracket Inst. 1�44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to mounting the booster Inst. 1�44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools Inst. 1�44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the tools Inst. 1�45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drilling holes for the mounting bolts Inst. 1�45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wall mounting Inst. 1�46 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pole mounting Inst. 1�48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Power and earth cabling Inst. 1�51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to power and earth cabling Inst. 1�51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC isolator Inst. 1�51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power cabling thermal properties Inst. 1�51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable routeing Inst. 1�52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GSM-209-020

20th Sep 02viii


GMR-0168P02902W61-O

Installing BTS enclosure power and earth cabling Inst. 1�53 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to installing BTS power and earth cabling Inst. 1�53 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools Inst. 1�53 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC power schematic Inst. 1�53 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC power connector Inst. 1�54 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC power connector procedure Inst. 1�55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Earth connection points Inst. 1�55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the power and E1/HDSL cable conduits Inst. 1�56 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting cables to the ac power supply isolator Inst. 1�58 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the site main earth Inst. 1�59 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installing booster power and earth cabling Inst. 1�60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to booster power and earth cabling Inst. 1�60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools Inst. 1�60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC power schematic Inst. 1�60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC power connector Inst. 1�61 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC power connector procedure Inst. 1�62 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Earth connection point Inst. 1�62 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the ac power cable Inst. 1�63 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting cables to the ac power supply isolator Inst. 1�65 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the supplementary earth Inst. 1�66 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

External antenna cabling guidelines Inst. 1�67 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External antenna cabling guidelines Inst. 1�67 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RF connectors Inst. 1�67 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

E1/HDSL link Inst. 1�68 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to E1/HDSL link Inst. 1�68 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E1/HDSL link connections Inst. 1�68 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminology for Tx and Rx Inst. 1�69 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installing E1/HDSL link cabling Inst. 1�70 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to installing E1/HDSL link cabling Inst. 1�70 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools required Inst. 1�70 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Routeing the E1/HDSL link to the wall bracket Inst. 1�70 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E1 cabling distance/loss Inst. 1�70 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HDSL cabling guidelines Inst. 1�71 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 2Installation procedures i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of installation procedures Inst. 2�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction to the procedures Inst. 2�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation procedures Inst. 2�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E1 link testing Inst. 2�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torque values Inst. 2�2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessing the equipment Inst. 2�3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BTS equipment delivery and packaging Inst. 2�4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chassis equipment Inst. 2�4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Unpacking the chassis equipment Inst. 2�5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to the unpacking Inst. 2�5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools required Inst. 2�5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unpacking the equipment Inst. 2�5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GSM-209-020

20th Sep 02


68P02902W61-O

GMR-01ix

Booster equipment delivery and packaging Inst. 2�6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chassis equipment Inst. 2�6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Unpacking the booster equipment Inst. 2�7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to unpacking the equipment Inst. 2�7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools required Inst. 2�7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unpacking the equipment Inst. 2�7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installing the BTS chassis Inst. 2�8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to installation of the BTS Inst. 2�8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools required Inst. 2�8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment access procedure Inst. 2�9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the chassis onto the wall bracket Inst. 2�10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chassis installation diagram Inst. 2�11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Connecting external cables to the enclosure Inst. 2�12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to connecting cables Inst. 2�12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools required Inst. 2�12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting earth straps Inst. 2�13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the ac power cable Inst. 2�14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the Horizonmicro2 antenna cable Inst. 2�16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optional internal antenna Inst. 2�17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the booster cables Inst. 2�18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the E1/HDSL link Inst. 2�19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installing the BTS solar cover Inst. 2�22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to installing the BTS solar cover Inst. 2�22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools and equipment Inst. 2�22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fitting the solar cover Inst. 2�23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Battery/cover installation Inst. 2�24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the battery and cover Inst. 2�24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installing the booster chassis Inst. 2�25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to installing booster chassis Inst. 2�25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools required Inst. 2�25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Antenna cabling Inst. 2�26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment access procedure Inst. 2�27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the chassis onto the wall bracket Inst. 2�28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Connecting external cables to the booster Inst. 2�29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to connecting booster external cables Inst. 2�29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools required Inst. 2�29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting earth straps Inst. 2�30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Supplementary earth connection diagram Inst. 2�31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the Rx, Tx and antenna cables Inst. 2�32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the ac power cable Inst. 2�35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up the clamp Inst. 2�36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the alarms cable Inst. 2�37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fitting the security bracket Inst. 2�37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installing the booster solar cover Inst. 2�40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to installing the booster solar cover Inst. 2�40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools and equipment required Inst. 2�40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fitting the booster solar cover Inst. 2�41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GSM-209-020

20th Sep 02x


GMR-0168P02902W61-O

Chapter 3BTS expansion i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction to the BTS expansion procedure Inst. 3�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About the procedure Inst. 3�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software requirements Inst. 3�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Master/slave establishment Inst. 3�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration of a BTS site Inst. 3�2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the BTSs Inst. 3�2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installing the expansion fibre optic cabling Inst. 3�5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools and equipment required Inst. 3�5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment access procedure Inst. 3�5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing the front solar covers Inst. 3�6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing the side and inner covers Inst. 3�7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Connecting the fibre optic cables Inst. 3�8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction Inst. 3�8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the fibre optic links to the master BTS Inst. 3�9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the fibre optic links to the slave BTS Inst. 3�10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Refitting the BTS solar covers Inst. 3�11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 4Commissioning i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Commissioning Inst. 4�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Commissioning overview Inst. 4�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Pre power up checks Inst. 4�2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction Inst. 4�2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Earth continuity checks Inst. 4�2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the system visually Inst. 4�3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Powering up the BTS and booster Inst. 4�4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparation for powering up the equipment Inst. 4�4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Powering up the equipment Inst. 4�5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM900 booster view Inst. 4�7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DCS1800 booster view Inst. 4�8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Battery check Inst. 4�9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to the battery check Inst. 4�9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery test Inst. 4�9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 5Decommissioning the equipment i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview of decommissioning Inst. 5�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction Inst. 5�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisite Inst. 5�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Decommissioning the BTS enclosure Inst. 5�2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction Inst. 5�2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before starting Inst. 5�2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure Inst. 5�3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS checklist Inst. 5�6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GSM-209-020

20th Sep 02


68P02902W61-O

GMR-01xi

Decommissioning a booster Inst. 5�7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction Inst. 5�7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before starting Inst. 5�7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure Inst. 5�7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Booster checklist Inst. 5�10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Category 523Maintenance Information (Maint.) i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 1General information i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction to maintenance Maint. 1�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recommended conditions and requirements Maint. 1�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In this chapter Maint. 1�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety Maint. 1�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Equipment access Maint. 1�2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to equipment access Maint. 1�2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Environmental requirements Maint. 1�2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance conditions Maint. 1�2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Access to a wall mounted BTS and booster Maint. 1�2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tools and materials Maint. 1�3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to tools and materials Maint. 1�3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS and booster tool kit Maint. 1�3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning equipment Maint. 1�3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torque values Maint. 1�4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 2Routine maintenance i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Routine maintenance overview Maint. 2�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to routine maintenance Maint. 2�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance procedures Maint. 2�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torque values Maint. 2�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Removing the BTS solar cover Maint. 2�2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to removing the BTS solar cover Maint. 2�2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools required Maint. 2�2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing the BTS solar cover Maint. 2�2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram of BTS enclosure and solar cover Maint. 2�3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Refitting the BTS solar cover Maint. 2�3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Removing the booster solar cover Maint. 2�4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to removing the booster solar cover Maint. 2�4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools required Maint. 2�4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing the booster solar cover Maint. 2�5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Refitting the booster solar cover Maint. 2�6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Annual routine maintenance Maint. 2�7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance overview Maint. 2�7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning equipment Maint. 2�7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance procedure Maint. 2�7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GSM-209-020

20th Sep 02xii


GMR-0168P02902W61-O

Chapter 3Fault diagnosis and repair i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fault diagnosis Maint. 3�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Reference to fault diagnosis information Maint. 3�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview of replacement procedures Maint. 3�2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to repair Maint. 3�2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FRU list Maint. 3�2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torque values Maint. 3�2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Replacing the BTS enclosure Maint. 3�3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to replacing a BTS enclosure Maint. 3�3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools required Maint. 3�3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal procedures Maint. 3�3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Solar cover removal Maint. 3�4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery removal procedure Maint. 3�5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable disconnection Maint. 3�5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS cable positions diagram Maint. 3�7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS enclosure removal procedure Maint. 3�9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS enclosure replacement procedure Maint. 3�9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Replacing the BTS solar cover Maint. 3�10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Solar cover replacement procedure Maint. 3�10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Solar cover attachment diagram Maint. 3�11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Replacing the battery Maint. 3�12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery replacement procedure Maint. 3�12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery attachment diagram Maint. 3�13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Replacing customer interface clamp Maint. 3�14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS connectors location diagram Maint. 3�14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customer interface clamp diagram Maint. 3�15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clamp removal procedure Maint. 3�15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clamp replacement procedure Maint. 3�16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Replacing a booster Maint. 3�17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to replacing a booster Maint. 3�17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools Maint. 3�17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Booster removal procedures Maint. 3�17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Solar cover removal procedure Maint. 3�18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Booster disconnection procedure Maint. 3�19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM900 booster cable locations diagram Maint. 3�20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DCS1800 booster cable locations diagram Maint. 3�21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Booster removal procedure Maint. 3�22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Booster removal diagram Maint. 3�23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Booster replacement Maint. 3�24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Replacing the booster solar cover Maint. 3�25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Solar cover replacement procedure Maint. 3�25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Replacing Horizonmicro2 antenna cables Maint. 3�26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to replacement procedures Maint. 3�26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External antenna cable removal procedure Maint. 3�26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External antenna cable replacement procedure Maint. 3�26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal antenna removal procedure Maint. 3�27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal antenna replacement procedure Maint. 3�27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal antenna location diagram Maint. 3�28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GSM-209-020

20th Sep 02


68P02902W61-O

GMR-01xiii

Replacing Horizoncompact2 antenna cables Maint. 3�29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to replacement procedures Maint. 3�29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing the Rx,Tx1 and Tx2 cables Maint. 3�29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the Rx,Tx1 and Tx2 cables Maint. 3�29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing the ANT1 and ANT2 cables Maint. 3�30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the ANT1 and ANT2 cables Maint. 3�30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Replacing the alarm cable Maint. 3�31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing the alarm cable Maint. 3�31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the alarm cable Maint. 3�31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Replacing the expansion fibre optic cables Maint. 3�32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to fibre optic replacement Maint. 3�32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools and equipment required Maint. 3�32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fibre optic connections Maint. 3�33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fibre optic cable removal procedure Maint. 3�34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fibre optic cable replacement procedure Maint. 3�35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expansion cover and casting Maint. 3�37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calibrating an MCU-m GCLK Maint. 3�38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to calibration Maint. 3�38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test equipment required Maint. 3�38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TTY cables and pin connections Maint. 3�39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety precautions Maint. 3�42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure for MCU-m GCLK calibration Maint. 3�42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram of breakout board Maint. 3�44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Breakout board connection point Maint. 3�45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restoring the site Maint. 3�45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Category 623Parts Information (Parts) i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 1Options and spares i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Options Parts 1�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to options Parts 1�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Factory fitted BTS options Parts 1�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Order and part numbers Parts 1�2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field fitted equipment options Parts 1�3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Order and part numbers Parts 1�4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BTS and booster spares Parts 1�5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to spares Parts 1�5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS order and part numbers Parts 1�6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Booster order and part numbers Parts 1�7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Labels Parts 1�9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Index I�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GSM-209-020

20th Sep 02xiv


GMR-0168P02902W61-O

GSM-209-020 Issue status of this manual

20th Sep 02


68P02902W61-O

GMR-011

Issue status of this manual

Introduction

The following shows the issue status of this manual since it was first released.

Versioninformation

The following lists the versions of this manual in order of manual issue:

Manualissue

Date ofissue

Remarks

O 14th Dec 01 Original issue.

Resolution ofServiceRequests

The following Service Requests are now resolved in this manual:

ServiceRequest

GMRNumber

Remarks

N/A N/A

GSM-209-020General information

20th Sep 022


GMR-0168P02902W61-O

General information

Importantnotice

If this manual was obtained when attending a Motorola training course, it will notbe updated or amended by Motorola. It is intended for TRAINING PURPOSESONLY. If it was supplied under normal operational circumstances, to support amajor software release, then corrections will be supplied automatically byMotorola in the form of General Manual Revisions (GMRs).

Purpose

Motorola cellular communications manuals are intended to instruct and assistpersonnel in the operation, installation and maintenance of the Motorola cellularinfrastructure equipment and ancillary devices. It is recommended that allpersonnel engaged in such activities be properly trained by Motorola.

WARNING Failure to comply with Motorola�s operation, installationand maintenance instructions may, in exceptionalcircumstances, lead to serious injury or death.

These manuals are not intended to replace the system and equipment trainingoffered by Motorola, although they can be used to supplement and enhance theknowledge gained through such training.

GSM-209-020 General information

20th Sep 02


68P02902W61-O

GMR-013

About thismanual

This manual provides a complete hardware description of the Horizonmicro2and Horizoncompact2 base transceiver stations (BTS), that implement the GSMstandards GSM900 and DCS1800. It is divided into categories as follows:

S Category 323 - Technical Description.

This category provides an introduction to, the specification for and atechnical description of the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2.

S Category 423 - Installation and Configuration.

This category provides the information to install and commission theHorizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2.

S Category 523 - Maintenance Information.

This category provides the information to maintain and repair theHorizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2.

S Category 623 - Parts Information.

This category provides the range of options and spares for theHorizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2.

The objectives of this manual are:

S To provide an understanding of the purpose and operation of allcomponents.

S To enable successful installation, commissioning and repair of the product.

The maintenance and repair procedures presume that operators at theOperations and Maintenance Centre Radio (OMC-R) have been able todiagnose a problem, and have provided an engineer or technician despatchedto the site with sufficient information to resolve the problem on arrival.

GSM-209-020General information

20th Sep 024


GMR-0168P02902W61-O

Crossreferences

Throughout this manual, cross references are made to the chapter numbers andsection names. The section name cross references are printed bold in text.

This manual is divided into uniquely identified and numbered chapters that, inturn, are divided into sections. Sections are not numbered, but are individuallynamed at the top of each page, and are listed in the table of contents.

Textconventions

The following conventions are used in the Motorola cellular infrastructuremanuals to represent keyboard input text, screen output text and special keysequences.

Input

Characters typed in at the keyboard are shown likethis.

Output

Messages, prompts, file listings, directories, utilities, andenvironmental variables that appear on the screen are shown likethis.

Special key sequences

Special key sequences are represented as follows:

CTRL�c Press the Control and c keys at the same time.

ALT�f Press the Alt and f keys at the same time.

| Press the pipe symbol key.

CR or RETURN Press the Return (Enter) key. The Return key isidentified with the ↵ symbol on both the PC andthe Sun keyboards. The keyboard Return keymay also be identified with the word Return.

GSM-209-020 First aid in case of electric shock

20th Sep 02


68P02902W61-O

GMR-015

First aid in case of electric shock

Warning

WARNING Do not touch the victim with your bare hands until theelectric circuit is broken.Switch off. If this is not possible, protect yourself withdry insulating material and pull or push the victim clear ofthe conductor.

Artificialrespiration

In the event of an electric shock it may be necessary to carry out artificialrespiration. Send for medical assistance immediately.

Burns treatment

If the patient is also suffering from burns, then, without hindrance to artificialrespiration, carry out the following:

1. Do not attempt to remove clothing adhering to the burn.

2. If help is available, or as soon as artificial respiration is no longer required,cover the wound with a dry dressing.

3. Do not apply oil or grease in any form.

GSM-209-020Reporting safety issues

20th Sep 026


GMR-0168P02902W61-O

Reporting safety issues

Introduction

Whenever a safety issue arises, carry out the following procedure in allinstances. Ensure that all site personnel are familiar with this procedure.

Procedure

Whenever a safety issue arises:

1. Make the equipment concerned safe, for example, by removing power.

2. Make no further attempt to tamper with the equipment.

3. Report the problem directly to the Customer Network Resolution Centre,Swindon +44 (0)1793 565444 or China +86 10 68437733 (telephone) andfollow up with a written report by fax, Swindon +44 (0)1793 430987 orChina +86 10 68423633 (fax).

4. Collect evidence from the equipment under the guidance of the CustomerNetwork Resolution Centre.

GSM-209-020 Warnings and cautions

20th Sep 02


68P02902W61-O

GMR-017

Warnings and cautions

Introduction

The following describes how warnings and cautions are used in this manual andin all manuals of this Motorola manual set.

Warnings

Definition of Warning

A warning is used to alert the reader to possible hazards that could cause lossof life, physical injury, or ill health. This includes hazards introduced duringmaintenance, for example, the use of adhesives and solvents, as well as thoseinherent in the equipment.

Example and format

WARNING Do not look directly into fibre optic cables or data in/outconnectors. Laser radiation can come from either the datain/out connectors or unterminated fibre optic cablesconnected to data in/out connectors.

Cautions

Definition of Warning

A caution means that there is a possibility of damage to systems, software orindividual items of equipment within a system. However, this presents no dangerto personnel.

Example and format

CAUTION Do not use test equipment that is beyond its calibrationdue date when testing Motorola base stations.

GSM-209-020General warnings

20th Sep 028


GMR-0168P02902W61-O

General warnings

IntroductionObserve the following warnings during all phases of operation, installation andmaintenance of the equipment described in the Motorola manuals. Failure tocomply with these warnings, or with specific warnings elsewhere in the Motorolamanuals, violates safety standards of design, manufacture and intended use ofthe equipment. Motorola assumes no liability for the customer�s failure to complywith these requirements.

Warning labelsPersonnel working with or operating Motorola equipment must comply with anywarning labels fitted to the equipment. Warning labels must not be removed,painted over or obscured in any way.

Specificwarnings

Warnings particularly applicable to the equipment are positioned on theequipment and within the text of this manual. These must be observed by allpersonnel at all times when working with the equipment, as must any otherwarnings given in text, on the illustrations and on the equipment.

High voltageCertain Motorola equipment operates from a dangerous high voltage of 230 Vac single phase or 415 V ac three phase supply which is potentially lethal.Therefore, the areas where the ac supply power is present must not beapproached until the warnings and cautions in the text and on the equipmenthave been complied with.

To achieve isolation of the equipment from the ac supply, the ac input isolatormust be set to off and locked.

Within the United Kingdom (UK) regard must be paid to the requirements of theElectricity at Work Regulations 1989. There may also be specific countrylegislation which need to be complied with, depending on where the equipmentis used.

RF radiationHigh RF potentials and electromagnetic fields are present in the base stationequipment when in operation. Ensure that all transmitters are switched off whenany antenna connections have to be changed. Do not key transmittersconnected to unterminated cavities or feeders.

Refer to the following standards:

S ANSI IEEE C95.1-1991, IEEE Standard for Safety Levels with Respect toHuman Exposure to Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Fields, 3 kHz to300 GHz.

S CENELEC 95 ENV 50166-2, Human Exposure to Electromagnetic FieldsHigh Frequency (10 kHz to 300 GHz).

GSM-209-020 General warnings

20th Sep 02


68P02902W61-O

GMR-019

Laser radiation

Do not look directly into fibre optic cables or optical data in/out connectors.Laser radiation can come from either the data in/out connectors or unterminatedfibre optic cables connected to data in/out connectors.

Liftingequipment

When dismantling heavy assemblies, or removing or replacing equipment, thecompetent responsible person must ensure that adequate lifting facilities areavailable. Where provided, lifting frames must be used for these operations.When equipments have to be manhandled, reference must be made to theManual Handling of Loads Regulations 1992 (UK) or to the relevant manualhandling of loads legislation for the country in which the equipment is used.

Do not ...... substitute parts or modify equipment.

Because of the danger of introducing additional hazards, do not install substituteparts or perform any unauthorized modification of equipment. Contact Motorolaif in doubt to ensure that safety features are maintained.

Battery supplies

Do not wear earth straps when working with standby battery supplies.

Toxic material

Certain equipment may incorporate components containing the highly toxicmaterial Beryllium or its oxide Beryllia or both. These materials are especiallyhazardous if:

S Beryllium materials are absorbed into the body tissues through the skin,mouth, or a wound.

S The dust created by breakage of Beryllia is inhaled.

S Toxic fumes are inhaled from Beryllium or Beryllia involved in a fire.

Beryllium warning labels are fitted to equipment incorporating Beryllium orBeryllium Oxide. Observe all safety instructions given on warning labels.

Beryllium Oxide is used within some components as an electrical insulator.Captive within the component it presents no health risk whatsoever. However, ifthe component should be broken open or burnt, the Beryllium Oxide, in the formof dust or fumes, could be released, with the potential for harm.

Lithiumbatteries

Lithium batteries, if subjected to mistreatment, may burst and ignite. Defectivelithium batteries must not be removed or replaced. Any boards containingdefective lithium batteries must be returned to Motorola for repair.

GSM-209-020General cautions

20th Sep 0210


GMR-0168P02902W61-O

General cautions

Introduction

Observe the following cautions during operation, installation and maintenance ofthe equipment described in the Motorola manuals. Failure to comply with thesecautions or with specific cautions elsewhere in the Motorola manuals may resultin damage to the equipment. Motorola assumes no liability for the customer�sfailure to comply with these requirements.

Caution labels

Personnel working with or operating Motorola equipment must comply with anycaution labels fitted to the equipment. Caution labels must not be removed,painted over or obscured in any way.

Specificcautions

Cautions particularly applicable to the equipment are positioned within the textof this manual. These must be observed by all personnel at all times whenworking with the equipment, as must any other cautions given in text, on theillustrations and on the equipment.

Fibre optics

The bending radius of all fibre optic cables must not be less than 60 mm.

Static discharge

Motorola equipment contains CMOS devices that are vulnerable to staticdischarge. Although the damage caused by static discharge may not beimmediately apparent, CMOS devices may be damaged in the long term due tostatic discharge caused by mishandling. Wear an approved earth strap whenadjusting or handling digital boards.

See Devices sensitive to static for further information.

GSM-209-020 Devices sensitive to static

20th Sep 02


68P02902W61-O

GMR-0111

Devices sensitive to static

Introduction

Certain metal oxide semiconductor (MOS) devices embody in their design a thinlayer of insulation that is susceptible to damage from electrostatic charge. Sucha charge applied to the leads of the device could cause irreparable damage.

These charges can be built up on nylon overalls, by friction, by pushing thehands into high insulation packing material or by use of unearthed solderingirons.

MOS devices are normally despatched from the manufacturers with the leadsshorted together, for example, by metal foil eyelets, wire strapping, or byinserting the leads into conductive plastic foam. Provided the leads are shortedit is safe to handle the device.

Specialhandlingtechniques

In the event of one of these devices having to be replaced, observe thefollowing precautions when handling the replacement:

S Always wear an earth strap which must be connected to the electrostaticpoint (ESP) on the equipment.

S Leave the short circuit on the leads until the last moment. It may benecessary to replace the conductive foam by a piece of wire to enable thedevice to be fitted.

S Do not wear outer clothing made of nylon or similar man made material. Acotton overall is preferable.

S If possible work on an earthed metal surface. Wipe insulated plastic worksurfaces with an anti-static cloth before starting the operation.

S All metal tools should be used and when not in use they should be placedon an earthed surface.

S Take care when removing components connected to electrostatic sensitivedevices. These components may be providing protection to the device.

When mounted onto printed circuit boards (PCBs), MOS devices are normallyless susceptible to electrostatic damage. However PCBs should be handled withcare, preferably by their edges and not by their tracks and pins, they should betransferred directly from their packing to the equipment (or the other wayaround) and never left exposed on the workbench.

GSM-209-020Motorola GSM manual set

20th Sep 0212


GMR-0168P02902W61-O

Motorola GSM manual set

Introduction

The following manuals provide the information needed to operate, install andmaintain the Motorola equipment.

Generic GSMmanuals

The following are the generic manuals in the GSM manual set, these manualsare release dependent:

Classificationnumber Name Order number

GSM-100-101 System Information: General 68P02901W01. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM-100-201 Operating Information: GSM System Operation 68P02901W14. . . GSM-100-202 Operating Information: OMC-R System

Administration 68P02901W19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM-100-313 Technical Description: OMC-R Database Schema 68P02901W34. GSM-100-320 Technical Description: BSS Implementation 68P02901W36. . . . . . . GSM-100-321 Technical Description: BSS Command Reference 68P02901W23. GSM-100-403 Installation & Configuration: GSM System

Configuration 68P02901W17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM-100-423 Installation & Configuration: BSS Optimization 68P02901W43. . . . GSM-100-413 Installation & Configuration: OMC-R Clean Install 68P02901W47. . GSM-100-501 Maintenance Information: Alarm Handling at

the OMC-R 68P02901W26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM-100-520 Maintenance Information: BSS Timers 68P02901W58. . . . . . . . . . . GSM-100-521 Maintenance Information: Device State Transitions 68P02901W57GSM-100-523 Maintenance Information: BSS Field

Troubleshooting 68P02901W51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM-100-503 Maintenance Information: GSM Statistics

Application 68P02901W56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM-100-721 Software Release Notes: BSS/RXCDR 68P02901W72. . . . . . . . . . GSM-100-712 Software Release Notes: OMC-R System 68P02901W74. . . . . . . .

GSM-209-020 Motorola GSM manual set

20th Sep 02


68P02902W61-O

GMR-0113

Related GSMmanuals

The following are related Motorola GSM manuals:


GSM-001-103 System Information: BSS Equipment Planning 68P02900W21. . . . GSM-002-103 System Information: DataGen 68P02900W22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM-002-703 Software Release Notes: DataGen 68P02900W76. . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM-005-103 System Information: GSM Advance Operational

Impact 68P02900W25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM-008-103 System Information: Network Health Analyst 68P02900W36. . . . . . GSM-008-703 Software Release Notes: Network Health Analyst 68P02900W77. GSM-TOOLS-001 System Information: Cell Optimization (COP) 68P02900W90. . . . . GSM-TOOLS-002 System Information: Motorola Analysis and

Reporting System (MARS) 68P02900W94. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM-TOOLS-701 Software Release Notes: Cell Optimization (COP) 68P02900W69. GSM-TOOLS-702 Software Release Notes: Motorola Analysis and

Reporting System (MARS) 68P02900W68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM-006-202 Operating Information: OMC-R System

Administration (OSI) 68P02901W10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM-006-413 Installation & Configuration: OSI Clean Install 68P02901W39. . . . . GSM-006-712 Software Release Notes: OMC-R OSI System 68P02901W70. . . .

Generic GPRSmanuals

The following are the generic manuals in the GPRS manual set, these manualsare release dependent:


GPRS-300-101 System Information: GPRS Overview 68P02903W01. . . . . . . . . . . . GPRS-300-202 Operating Information: OMC-G System

Administration 68P02903W03. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPRS-300-222 Operating Information: GSN System Administration 68P02903W37GPRS-300-313 Technical Description: OMC-G Database Schema 68P02903W46. GPRS-300-321 Technical Description: GSN Command Reference 68P02903W18. GPRS-300-423 Installation & Configuration: GSN Clean Install 68P02903W47. . . . GPRS-300-413 Installation & Configuration: OMC-G Clean Install 68P02903W04. GPRS-300-501 Maintenance Information: Alarm Handling at

the OMC-G 68P02903W19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPRS-300-503 Maintenance Information: GSN Statistics

Application 68P02903W20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPRS-300-722 Software Release Notes: GSN System 68P02903W76. . . . . . . . . . GPRS-300-712 Software Release Notes: OMC-G System 68P02903W70. . . . . . . .

Related GPRSmanuals

The following are related Motorola GPRS manuals:


GPRS-001-103 System Information: GPRS Equipment Planning 68P02903W02. . GPRS-005-103 System Information: GSN Advance Operational

Impact 68P02903W38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GSM-209-020Motorola GSM manual set

20th Sep 0214


GMR-0168P02902W61-O

BSS servicemanuals

The following are the Motorola Base Station service manuals, these manualsare not release dependent. The internal organization and makeup of servicemanual sets may vary, they may consist of from one to four separate manuals,but they can all be ordered using the overall catalogue number shown below:


GSM-100-020 Service Manual: BTS 68P02901W37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM-100-030 Service Manual: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM-105-020 Service Manual: M-Cell2 68P02901W75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM-106-020 Service Manual: M-Cell6 68P02901W85. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM-201-020 Service Manual: M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+ 68P02901W95. . . . . . . GSM-202-020 Service Manual: M-Cellaccess 68P02901W65. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM-203-020 Service Manual: Horizonmicro 68P02902W36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM-206-020 Service Manual: Horizoncompact 68P02902W15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM-205-020 Service Manual: Horizonmacro Indoor 68P02902W06. . . . . . . . . . . GSM-204-020 Service Manual: Horizonmacro Outdoor 68P02902W12. . . . . . . . . . GSM-207-020 Service Manual: Horizonoffice 68P02902W46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM-209-020 Service Manual: Horizonmicro2 Horizoncompact2 68P02902W61. GSM-208-020 Service Manual: Horizonmacro 12 Carrier Outdoor 68P02902W66

GPRS servicemanuals

The following are the Motorola GPRS service manuals, these manuals includethe Packet Control Unit (PCU) service manual which becomes part of the BSSfor GPRS:

GPRS-301-020 Service Manual:GPRS Support Nodes (GSN) 68P02903W05. . . . . GPRS-302-020 Service Manual: Packet Control Unit (PCU) 68P02903W10. . . . . . .

Classificationnumber

The classification number is used to identify the type and level of a manual. Forexample, manuals with the classification number GSM-100-2xx containoperating information.

Order number

The Motorola 68P order (catalogue) number is used to order manuals.

Orderingmanuals

All orders for Motorola manuals must be placed with your Motorola Local Officeor Representative. Manuals are ordered using the order (catalogue) number.Motorola manual sets may also be ordered on CD-ROM.

GSM-209-020 GMR amendment

20th Sep 02


68P02902W61-O

GMR-0115

GMR amendment

Introduction toGMRs

Changes to a manual that occur after the printing date are incorporated into themanual using General Manual Revisions (GMRs). GMRs are issued to correctMotorola manuals as and when required. A GMR has the same identity as thetarget manual. Each GMR is identified by a number in a sequence that starts at01 for each manual at each issue. GMRs are issued in the form of loose leafpages, with a pink instruction sheet on the front.

GMR procedure

When a GMR is received, remove and replace pages in this manual, as detailedon the GMR pink instruction sheet.

GSM-209-020GMR amendment record

20th Sep 0216


GMR-0168P02902W61-O

GMR amendment record

GMRinstructions

When a GMR is inserted in this manual, the amendment record below iscompleted to record the GMR. Retain the pink instruction sheet thataccompanies each GMR and insert it in a suitable place in this manual for futurereference.

Amendmentrecord

Record the insertion of GMRs in this manual in the following table:

GMR number Incorporated by (signature) Date

01 Greg Tomes 20th Sep 02

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

CHAPTER 2EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURES

CHAPTER 3POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM

CHAPTER 4DIGITAL MODULES

CHAPTER 5RF MODULES

CHAPTER 1INTRODUCTION AND

SPECIFICATIONS

CHAPTER 7EXPANSION FEATURE

CHAPTER 6 HEAT MANAGEMENT

20th Sep 02

Technical Description: Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2

68P02902W62-O i

Category 323

Technical Description (Tech.)

GSM-209-323

20th Sep 02ii


68P02902W62-O

GSM-209-323

20th Sep 02


68P02902W62-O iii

Category 323Technical Description (Tech.) i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 1Introduction and specification of equipment i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 BTSs Tech. 1�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview Tech. 1�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software requirements Tech. 1�2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery backup Tech. 1�2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dual frequency support Tech. 1�2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frequency hopping Tech. 1�2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Links Tech. 1�2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Horizonmicro2 external view Tech. 1�3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Horizoncompact2 system Tech. 1�4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Chapter 2Equipment enclosures i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS enclosure Tech. 2�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview of the BTS enclosure Tech. 2�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS modules location diagram Tech. 2�2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS components location diagram Tech. 2�3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Chapter 3Power supply system i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS power supply system Tech. 3�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview Tech. 3�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Components Tech. 3�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location diagram Tech. 3�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


GSM-209-323

20th Sep 02iv


68P02902W62-O



Chapter 4Digital modules i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital modules Tech. 4�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview of digital modules Tech. 4�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RDIS module Tech. 4�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DINO/RHINO module Tech. 4�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HDSL module Tech. 4�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line termination modules Tech. 4�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .





GSM-209-323

20th Sep 02


68P02902W62-O v


Chapter 5RF modules i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of RF modules Tech. 5�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction Tech. 5�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location diagram Tech. 5�2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .





Chapter 6Heat management i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heat management of the BTS Tech. 6�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview of BTS heat management Tech. 6�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module heaters Tech. 6�2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .




GSM-209-323

20th Sep 02vi


68P02902W62-O

Chapter 7Expansion feature i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Expansion feature Tech. 7�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expansion feature overview Tech. 7�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dual band support Tech. 7�2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field replaceable units Tech. 7�2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration data Tech. 7�2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single band BTS configurations Tech. 7�3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dual band BTS configurations Tech. 7�3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Antenna options Tech. 7�4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software requirement Tech. 7�4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

20th Sep 02


68P02902W62-O i

Chapter 1

Introduction and specification of

equipment

GSM-209-323

20th Sep 02ii


68P02902W62-O

GSM-209-323

20th Sep 02


68P02902W62-O iii

Chapter 1Introduction and specification of equipment i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction to the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 BTSs Tech. 1�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview Tech. 1�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software requirements Tech. 1�2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery backup Tech. 1�2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dual frequency support Tech. 1�2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frequency hopping Tech. 1�2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Links Tech. 1�2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Horizonmicro2 external view Tech. 1�3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Horizoncompact2 system Tech. 1�4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


GSM-209-323

20th Sep 02iv


68P02902W62-O

GSM-209-323 Introduction to the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 BTSs

20th Sep 02


68P02902W62-O Tech. 1�1

Introduction to the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 BTSs

Overview

The Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 are two-carrier base transceiverstations (BTSs) that operate in the GSM900 or DCS1800 frequency bands.

They can be deployed indoor or out of doors, operated over a wide temperaturerange, and can be wall or pole mounted.

Both systems are covered in this service manual because of the similaritiesbetween them:

S They have the same external appearance and are based on similarhardware.

S They have an Expansion feature that allows two or three Horizonmicro2or Horizoncompact2 BTS units to be connected together to effectively forma two, four or six carrier site.

When the expansion feature is used (see Chapter 7), the two or threeHorizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 BTS units in the expanded system areinterconnected by fibre optic cables. One BTS in the configuration acts as themaster and the other units as slaves.

The master BTS in an expanded system is connected to the network by an E1or HDSL link.

Horizonmicro2 power

The Horizonmicro2 GSM900 generates 1.2 W (+30.8 dBm) per carrier, while theDCS1800 generates 1.0 W (30.0 dBm) per carrier.

NOTE Motorola does not recommend using the Horizonmicro2 inan omni 6 site configuration unless the cell radius is small(in-building coverage required, for example). This is due tothe very low Tx output power generated if six carriers arecombined. Motorola recommends one antenna per site forHorizonmicro2 and two antennas per site forHorizoncompact2.

Horizoncompact2 power

The Horizoncompact2 incorporates a booster that enables it to provide macrocoverage. The BTS contains two transmitter amplifiers, which provide thefollowing power outputs:

S The GSM900 version boosts the BTS output of 1.2 W (+30.8 dBm) percarrier to 10 W (+40 dBm) per carrier.

S The DCS1800 version, boosts the BTS output of 2.0 W (33.0 dBm) percarrier to 10 W (+40 dBm) per carrier.

The booster is connected to a single BTS and antenna. An omni macro sitecomprising three BTSs requires three boosters.

GSM-209-323Introduction to the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 BTSs

20th Sep 02Tech. 1�2


68P02902W62-O

Softwarerequirements

Software release GSR4 limits the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 tofunction only as single BTS systems without expansion capabilities.

Software release GSR5 or later is required to support the expansion feature forthe Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2. The GSR5 software is needed in bothmaster and slave BTSs to enable the master/slave relationship. If GSR4software is used on an expanded system, only the BTS with the E1/HDSLconnection will be functional.

Battery backup

Battery backup allows a minimum of five minutes full operation for the BTS only;the booster has no battery backup. During battery backup operation the boosteroperates in bypass mode.

Dual frequencysupport

There are two variants of the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 BTSs. Onevariant operates in the GSM900 frequency band and the other variant operatesin the DCS1800 frequency band. The operating frequency is hardware specificand cannot be changed by software.

Although a single BTS can only operate at the frequency it is designed for, anexpanded system can have a mix of the two variants and can thus support bothGSM900 and DCS1800 frequencies.

Frequencyhopping

The Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 support synthesizer frequencyhopping (SFH).

Links

Options exist for sites to be interconnected by E1 or HDSL (star and daisychain) links.

NOTE Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 BTSs shipped after31st December 2001 are not fitted with an internal HDSLmodem. A suitable external HDSL modem must be used ifa HDSL link to the BSC is required for these BTSs.Contact the local Motorola office for assistance prior topurchasing a HDSL modem for this purpose.

GSM-209-323 Introduction to the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 BTSs

20th Sep 02


68P02902W62-O Tech. 1�3

Horizonmicro2external view

Figure 1-1 shows a Horizonmicro2 BTS with expansion unit cover fitted.

ig.055.rh

Figure 1-1 Horizonmicro2 BTS with expansion unit cover

GSM-209-323Introduction to the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 BTSs



68P02902W62-O

Horizoncompact2system

Figure 1-2 shows a Horizoncompact2 BTS and booster unit.

ig .0 6 0 .rh

RF CABLING

RF CABLE TOANTENNA 1


RS232 ALARMLINK

Horizoncompact2Booster

Horizoncompact2BTS

Figure 1-2 Horizoncompact2 BTS and booster unit

GSM-209-323 Specifications

20th Sep 02


68P02902W62-O Tech. 1�5

SpecificationsThe following information provides the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2BTS and booster specifications.

Approval andsafety

Table 1-1 displays the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 approval and safetyinformation.

Table 1-1 Approval and safety information

Type approval EMC Safety

ETS 300 609�1 ETS 300 342�2EN 41003

EN 60950

Environmentallimits

Table 1-2 displays the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 environmentallimits.

Table 1-2 Environmental limits

Environment Temperature Relative humidity

Operating �33 _C to +50 _C 5% to 100%

Storage (packaged) �33 _C to +70 _C 8% to 100%

DimensionsTable 1-3 displays the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 equipmentdimensions.

Table 1-3 BTS dimensions (mm)

Equipment Height Width Depth, includingwall bracket

BTS 532 542 201

Booster 347 541 226

WeightTable 1-4 displays the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 equipment weights.

Table 1-4 BTS weights (kg)

EquipmentWeight, excluding wallbracket, solar cover or

battery

Weight, including wallbracket, solar cover and

battery

BTS 21 28

Booster GSM900 15 20

Booster DCS1800 19 24

GSM-209-323Specifications



68P02902W62-O

Powerrequirements

Table 1-5 displays the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 equipment powerrequirements.

Table 1-5 BTS power requirements

Equipment Supply voltage range Maximum supply currentrange

BTS88 V to 264 V ac (45�66 Hz)

7.8 A to 2.6 A(depending on supply voltage)

Booster88 V to 264 V ac (45 66 Hz)

2.3 A

Battery backup

Table 1-6 shows the specifications for the battery used in the Horizonmicro2 andHorizoncompact2 BTSs.

Table 1-6 Battery specifications

Voltage Capacity Backup duration

22 V dc 2.5 Ah > 5 minutes

Powerconsumption

Table 1-7 displays the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 equipment powerconsumption figures.

Table 1-7 BTS power consumption (W)

Equipment Ambienttemperature

Maximumpower

consumption

Typical powerconsumption

BTS (heater on) �40 °C to 10 °C 688 658

BTS (heater off) 10 °C to 50 °C 188 138

Booster GSM900 � 169 144

Booster DCS1800 � 199 170

NOTE The maximum power consumption figures apply toextreme operating conditions (such as minimum operatingambient temperature, heaters on, maximum RF outputpower, charging batteries and lowest module efficiencies).Typical power consumption is for the equipment running atfull RF output power, trickle battery charge and nominalmodule efficiencies.


20th Sep 02


68P02902W62-O Tech. 1�7

RF outputpower

Horizonmicro2 BTS

Table 1-8 displays the Horizonmicro2 transmitter output power.

Table 1-8 BTS transmitter output at BTS booster connector

Equipment Nominal Max Min dBm (nominal)

BTS GSM900 1.2 W 2.13 W 0.68 W 30.8 dBm +/�2.0 dB

BTS DCS1800 1.0 W 1.78 W 0.56 W 30.0 dBm +/�2.0 dB

NOTE The values of +/�2.0 dB represent nominal conditions.Under extreme conditions these values can reach+/�2.5 dB for both GSM900 and DCS1800 variants.

Horizoncompact2 BTS

Table 1-9 displays the Horizoncompact2 transmitter output power.

Table 1-9 BTS transmitter output at BTS booster connector


BTS GSM900 1.32 W 1.86 W 0.93 W 31.2 dBm +/�1.5 dB

BTS DCS1800 2.19 W 3.09 W 1.55 W 33.4 dBm +/�1.5 dB

Table 1-10 displays the Horizoncompact2 booster input power.

Table 1-10 BTS transmitter output at the booster input


BTS GSM900 1.2 W 1.7 W 0.85 W 30.8 dBm +/�1.5 dB

BTS DCS1800 2.0 W 2.82 W 1.41 W 33.0 dBm +/�1.5 dB

NOTE The Horizoncompact2 GSM900 BTS output power is1.32 W (31.2 dBm), and 2.19 W (33.4 dBm) for theDCS1800 BTS. This value is reduced by the two metreconnection cable to 1.2 W for GSM900 and 2.0 W forDCS1800 on input to the Horizoncompact2 booster.




68P02902W62-O

Horizoncompact2 booster

Table 1-11 displays the Horizoncompact2 booster RF output power at antennaconnector.

Table 1-11 Horizoncompact2 booster RF output power


Booster GSM900 10 W 17.78 W 5.62 W 40 dBm +/�2.5 dB

Booster DCS1800 10 W 17.78 W 5.62 W 40 dBm +/�2.5 dB

Table 1-12 shows the Horizoncompact2 booster in bypass mode RF outputpower at antenna connector.

Table 1-12 Horizoncompact2 booster in bypass mode RF output power

Equipment Min watt dBm

Booster GSM900 0.48 > 26.8 dBm

Booster DCS1800 0.74 > 28.7 dBm

NOTE With reference to the GSM900 booster only, the output atthe transmitter within the booster in bypass mode isreduced more than the Horizoncompact2 BTS output dueto losses through switches and filters within the booster.

Receiver sensitivity

The sensitivity of the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 BTS receiver is�107 dBm.


20th Sep 02


68P02902W62-O Tech. 1�9

Frequency bandcharacteristics

BTS radio channels (RF carriers) are full duplex (transmit and receive) with thecharacteristics listed in Table 1-13.

Table 1-13 Frequency band characteristics

GSM900 DCS1800

Transmit frequency band (MHz) 925 to 960 1805 to 1880

Receive frequency band (MHz) 880 to 915 1710 to 1785

Transmit/receive duplexseparation (MHz)

45 95

Channel width (kHz) 200 200

Minimum channel spacing (kHz) 600 600

Number of channels 174 374

Transmit frequency guard bands(MHz)

925.0 to 925.1959.9 to 960.0

1805.0 to 1805.11879.9 to 1880.0

Receive frequency guard bands(MHz)

880.0 to 880.1914.9 to 915.0

1710.0 to 1710.11784.9 to 1785.0

Transmit channel centrefrequency (MHz)

Even 10ths of aMHz from 925.2 to

959.8


1879.8

Receive channel centrefrequency (MHz)


914.8


1784.8




68P02902W62-O

20th Sep 02


68P02902W62-O i

Chapter 2

Equipment enclosures

GSM-209-323

20th Sep 02ii


68P02902W62-O

GSM-209-323

20th Sep 02


68P02902W62-O iii

Chapter 2Equipment enclosures i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BTS enclosure Tech. 2�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of the BTS enclosure Tech. 2�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS modules location diagram Tech. 2�2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS components location diagram Tech. 2�3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


GSM-209-323

20th Sep 02iv


68P02902W62-O

GSM-209-323 BTS enclosure

20th Sep 02


68P02902W62-O Tech. 2�1

BTS enclosure

Overview of theBTS enclosure

The Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 are designed to be wall or polemounted. A mounting bracket is provided and, once this is in place, thecomplete Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 can easily be installed onto thebracket. The Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 are provided with mouldedcovers which can be removed to allow access for maintenance purposes.

All input and output cables (for example, ac power, HDSL and E1 lines) enterthe enclosure via the underside. The external RF cables may be routed fromeither the top or bottom of the enclosure. All cables have specified routesbetween the enclosure body and each connector.

The Horizonmicro2 has a built in duplexer and isolator/combiner module forTx1/Rx output and input.

The Horizoncompact2 does not contain a duplexer or isolator/combiner modulein the chassis. The duplexer is located in the Horizoncompact2 booster forTx/Rx output and input. There are two isolators; one in each transmit path fromthe dual transceiver (DTRX) module. The outputs go directly to theHorizoncompact2 booster.

GSM-209-323BTS enclosure



68P02902W62-O

BTS moduleslocationdiagram

Figure 2-1 shows the locations of the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2modules and components.

RX/TXCONNECTOR

(External N-typeRF connector)

AC-DCPOWERSUPPLYMODULE

RDISMODULE

TX2 CABLECONNECTOR

SLAVE (ExternalN-type RFconnector)

AC-DCPOWERSUPPLYMODULE

AC SUPPLYSOCKET

Horizonmicro2 BTS

Horizoncompact2 BTS

ig.081.rh

ig.081.rh

AC SUPPLYSOCKET

DTRX MODULE(incorporating

isolator modules)

DUMMYCONNECTORS

RX CABLECONNECTOR


TX1 CABLECONNECTOR

MASTER(External N-typeRF connector)

DTRX MODULE(incorporating

isolator modules)

RDISMODULE

Figure 2-1 Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 modules and components

GSM-209-323 BTS enclosure

20th Sep 02


68P02902W62-O Tech. 2�3

BTScomponentslocationdiagram

Figure 2-2 shows the location of BTS components and connectors.

AC-DC PSMDISTRIBUTION

BOARD

HDSLMODULES

CUSTOMERINTERFACE

CLAMP

DINO/RHINO

BATTERY

Front view

Underside view with battery removed

LINE TERMINATIONMODULE (RHINO SHOWN)

ALARMS CONNECTOR FROM BOOSTER

MMIBATTERYCONNECTOR

FIBRE OPTICCONNECTORS

ig.084.rh

Figure 2-2 BTS component locations

GSM-209-323Booster



68P02902W62-O

Booster

Overview of thebooster

The Horizoncompact2 booster is designed to be wall or pole mounted. Amounting bracket is provided and, once this is in place, the completeHorizoncompact2 booster can easily be installed onto the bracket. TheHorizoncompact2 booster is provided with a moulded cover which can beremoved to allow access for maintenance purposes.

The cables for ac power, HDSL and E1 links enter via the underside of the unit.RF cables may be routed from either the top or bottom.

There is a difference in the design between the GSM900 booster and DCS1800booster (see Figure 2-3 and Figure 2-4).

GSM900boosterdiagram

Figure 2-3 shows the Horizoncompact2 GSM900 booster with cover removed.

AC POWERSOCKET

TX2ANT2

RX

ALARMSPLUG

TX1

ANT1

Figure 2-3 GSM900 booster

GSM-209-323 Booster

20th Sep 02


68P02902W62-O Tech. 2�5

DCS1800boosterdiagram

Figure 2-4 shows the Horizoncompact2 DCS1800 booster with cover removed.

TX1

ANT2

AC POWERSOCKET

ANT1TX2

RX

ALARMSPLUG

Figure 2-4 DCS1800 booster

GSM-209-323Booster



68P02902W62-O

20th Sep 02


68P02902W62-O i

Chapter 3

Power supply system

GSM-209-323

20th Sep 02ii


68P02902W62-O

GSM-209-323

20th Sep 02


68P02902W62-O iii

Chapter 3Power supply system i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BTS power supply system Tech. 3�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview Tech. 3�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Components Tech. 3�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location diagram Tech. 3�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .




GSM-209-323

20th Sep 02iv


68P02902W62-O

GSM-209-323 BTS power supply system

20th Sep 02


68P02902W62-O Tech. 3�1

BTS power supply system

Overview

The Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 ac-dc power supply module (PSM)provides all internal voltages from single phase ac supply in the maximum inputrange 88 V to 264 V, 45 Hz to 66 Hz.

Alarm signals relating to ac supply fail, low voltage disconnect imminent andpower supply overtemperature are generated within the ac-dc PSM and fed tothe MCU-m section of RDIS.

Components

The power supply system comprises:

S An ac-dc power supply module (AC-DC PSM).

S A distribution board.

S A backup battery.

Locationdiagram

Figure 3-1 shows the location of the power supply system components.

AC-DCPSM

DISTRIBUTIONBOARD

BATTERY

Figure 3-1 BTS power supply

GSM-209-323BTS power supply module



68P02902W62-O

BTS power supply module

Distributionboard

The power supplies generated by the ac-dc PSM are distributed via thedistribution board and used by the various modules listed in Table 3-1 below.The power supply levels are all controlled by the ac-dc PSM, there are noadjustable parameters. A battery provides an auxiliary power source in theevent of ac supply failure.

Figure 3-2 shows the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 distribution board.

CONN5

CONN4

CONN3

CONN1

BATTERY CONNECTOR

CONN2

Figure 3-2 Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 distribution board

Table 3-1 displays the voltages on the ac-dc PSM connectors.

Table 3-1 PSM connector voltages

Connector Module +3.3 V +5 V +8 V +12 V �12 V +25 V

CONN1 DTRX 0 X X X X X

CONN2 Battery X

CONN3 RDIS X X X X X X

CONN4 DTRX 1 X X X X X

NOTE The supply output from ac-dc PSM CONN4 is connecteddirectly to distribution board CONN5.

GSM-209-323 BTS power supply module

20th Sep 02


68P02902W62-O Tech. 3�3

Power supplymodule

Figure 3-3 shows the power supply module and socket connector from supplycable.

SCREW TO SECURESOCKET CONNECTOR

TO PSM

SOCKET CONNECTORFROM SUPPLY CABLE

(see Figure 3-4)

ENSURE GASKET IS FITTEDBEFORE ATTACHING

SOCKET TO PLUG

Figure 3-3 Power supply module




68P02902W62-O

AC powerconnections

Figure 3-4 shows the ac supply connector.

Figure 3-4 AC supply connector

WARNING Local regulations may apply for different power cablecolours.

Table 3-2 lists the ac power connections.

Table 3-2 AC supply connections

Pin Use Colour

Top Earth Green and yellow

1 Neutral Blue or black

2 Live Brown or red

3 Not used Not used


20th Sep 02


68P02902W62-O Tech. 3�5

AC-DC PSM

AC-DC PSM description

The ac-dc power supply module is directly plugged into the Horizonmicro2 orHorizoncompact2 distribution board, and provides:

S A total maximum output power of 170 W.

S Discrete voltages.

S Alarms.

S An ac supply for the enclosure heaters.

The ac-dc PSM consists of:

S An ac-dc converter sub-module using an 88 to 264 V ac single phaseinput, with power factor correction, converting it to a high line 360 V dcoutput.

S A dc-dc converter sub-module which takes the high line 360 V dc output ofthe previous sub-module and converts it to a +25 V dc supply which isused as follows:

� Routed to the dc-dc converters.

� Float charges the 22 V battery.

The dc-dc converters each use the +25 V dc input to generate the +3.3 V, +5 V,+8 V, +12 V, �12 V dc and �25 V dc outputs respectively for driving logic,interface and alarms.

The ac supply for the two equipment heaters is fuse protected and controlled bya temperature dependent switch within the heaters.

The module has a low voltage disconnect (LVD) relay which enables the ac-dcPSM to disconnect the battery once its voltage has reached a minimum level.This protects the battery from being fully discharged.




68P02902W62-O

AC-DC PSM block diagram

Figure 3-5 shows a functional block diagram of the ac-dc PSM.

+3.3 V

+5 V

+8 V

+12 V+12 V

+8 V

+5 V

+3.3 V

CONN4

AC-DC POWER SUPPLY MODULE

ALARMSIGNALS

+25 V

LVDRELAY

�12 V�12 V

360 V DC to +25 V DC

110 V AC/230 V ACSWITCH

EMC FILTERWITH FUSE

ACINPUT

PL1

PL2

PL3

+25 V

POWER FACTORCORRECTED AC

to 360 V DC

Figure 3-5 Functional block diagram of the ac-dc PSM


20th Sep 02


68P02902W62-O Tech. 3�7

Power supplysignals andinterfaces

Table 3-3 lists the ac-dc PSM sense signals and interfaces.

Table 3-3 AC�DC PSM sense signal and interfaces

Connector Signal Remarks

PL1 AC input Single phase input, via EMC filter.

PL2 AC switched output RDIS heater supply.

PL3 AC switched output DTRX heater supply.

CONN4 +25 V switchedoutput

Used to float charge the battery andprovides battery backup.

+3.3 V

+5 V

+8 V For distribution to the various modules.

+12 V

�12 V

+25 V

MF Fail AC input failure.

LVD imminent An alarm is signalled when the +25 Vunswitched supply drops to 20.5 V.

Overtemperature(OT) alarm

Monitors the temperature of the ac-dcPSM.




68P02902W62-O

Events andalarms

The power supply system can generate a number of events to indicate itsstatus. These events are sent as warnings or alarms to the OMC-R and in somecases can directly shut down the BTS. For details of OMC-R alarms, refer to themanual Maintenance Information: Alarm Handling at the OMC-R(GSM-100-501). The events that can be generated by the power supply systemare described below:

S Mains fail (MF) alarm

An alarm is generated if the input to the ac-dc converter falls towithin 65 to 78 V ac. All other power supplies remain active,maintained by the battery backup.

S Low voltage disconnect imminent (LVDI) warning

After an ac supply failure (ac-dc converter fail) the BTS continues tofunction using the battery backup. During this time the +22 V outputis monitored and, if the output voltage falls to +20.5 V (+/�0.5 V dc),an LVDI warning is generated.

S Battery low voltage disconnect (battery LVD) shutdown

If the output voltage continues to fall and reaches the range +18 V(+/�0.5 V dc), a battery LVD signal is generated and the battery isdisconnected from the load.

S Under temperature (UT) inhibit

Temp 1 (T1) is the trip level temperature (0 °C, for undertemperature).

When power is first applied, if T1 is below 0 °C the heater matscome on and the output of the +3.3 V, +5 V, +8 V, +12 V and �12 Vconverters are not enabled until the temperature has exceeds 0 °C(trip level).

S Overtemperature (OT) alarm

Temp 2 (T2) is the trip level temperature (90 to 100 °C, typically90 °C for overtemperature).

An alarm is generated when the temperature at the ac-dc PSMheatsink reaches T2 � 5 °C, typically 85 °C.

S Overtemperature shutdown

If the temperature continues to rise and reaches T2, the ac-dc PSMis shutdown.

After such a shutdown, the ac-dc PSM is only allowed to reactivatewhen a temperature of Temp 3 (T3) is reached (55 °C to 80 °C,typically 65 °C). A hysterisis (H) of 20 °C is used to preventoscillation between ac-dc PSM shutdown and reactivation.

Reactivation is automatic.

GSM-209-323 Battery backup

20th Sep 02


68P02902W62-O Tech. 3�9

Battery backup

Purpose

The power system incorporates a battery backup that maintains power in theevent of an ac supply failure. The battery is able to supply sufficient power (for aminimum of five minutes) for the system to perform all the tasks necessary foran orderly shutdown.

Description

The standard battery pack is made up from eleven lead-acid 2 volt cells,enclosed in a plastic case. The battery is sealed and never needs topping up.Expected life of the battery is approximately five years. The output is protectedby a 20 A blade fuse, accessible from the top of the pack.

The 22 V battery is connected to the +25 V dc switched supply line, whichcharges the battery pack under supply healthy conditions.

The ac-dc PSM monitors the +25 V dc switched supply during battery backupconditions. It generates an alarm when it reaches the LVD imminent level(20.5 V) and ultimately de-energizes the battery disconnect relay when theoutput drops to 18 V.

Battery packdiagram

Figure 3-6 shows the battery pack with blade fuse.

BLADE FUSE (20 A)

Figure 3-6 Battery pack showing blade fuse

GSM-209-323Booster power supply



68P02902W62-O

Booster power supply

Overview ofbooster powersupply

The booster power supply comprises:

S An ac-dc booster power supply module (BPSM) provides all internal voltagesfrom single phase ac supply in the nominal range 88 V to 264 V, 45 Hz to66 Hz, maximum output of 150 W (GSM900) or 215 W (DCS1800).

S Two power outputs provide +12 V dc and +28 V dc (GSM900) or +26 V dc(DCS1800).

AC supplysocketconnector

Figure 3-7 shows the location of the power supply socket connector from thesupply cable.

POWER SOCKET

(NOT USED)

AC POWER SOCKET

(NOT USED)NEUTRAL

(BLUE OR BLACK) LIVE (BROWN OR RED)

AC POWER PLUGON BOOSTER

LIVE (BROWN OR RED)

EARTH(GREEN AND YELLOW)

GSM900 VERSIONDCS1800 VERSION

NOTE The BPSM is located within the booster case and is notaccessible.

Figure 3-7 Booster power supply connections

GSM-209-323 Booster power supply

20th Sep 02


68P02902W62-O Tech. 3�11

AC power pindesignations


Table 3-2 lists the ac power connections.

Table 3-4 AC supply connections

Pin Use Colour

Top Earth Green and yellow

1 Neutral Blue or black

2 Line Brown or red

3 Not used Not used

AC-DC BPSM

The ac-dc BPSM provides:

S A total maximum output of 150 W of power.

S Discrete voltages.

The ac-dc BPSM consists of:

S An ac-dc converter sub-module using an 88 to 264 V ac single phaseinput, with power correction.

S An ac-dc inverter which generates the +12 V dc, +28 V dc (GSM900version) +26 V dc (DSC1800 version) for driving the amplifiers.

The ac input is fused for live and neutral lines, then EMC filtered. The next stageconsists of a rectifier and input current limiting. This is followed by a powerfactor correction stage. Finally, a current mode, pulse width modulation (PWM)controlled inverter stage produces the outputs.




68P02902W62-O

Functional diagram

Figure 3-8 shows a functional block diagram of the ac-dc BPSM.

INPUTFILTER

RECTIFIERCURRENT LIMITER

POWERFACTOR

CORRECTION

CORRECTORCONTROL

AUXILIARYSUPPLY

PWM CONTROL

FUSE

FUSE

L (2)

N (1)

E

J301�1J301�2J300�1J300�2

J301�3J301�4J300�3J300�4

0 V

AUXILIARYREGULATOR

J300�S

J301�S

+12 V

+12 V

+28 V

0 V

INVERTER

V100-1

J100-4

TB13

INPUT

GSM900OR+26 V

DCS1800

OUTPUT

OUTPUT

Figure 3-8 Functional block diagram of the ac�dc BPSM

GSM-209-323 Booster power supply

20th Sep 02


68P02902W62-O Tech. 3�13

Interfaces

Table 3-5 lists the ac-dc BPSM sense signal and interfaces.

Table 3-5 BPSM interfaces

Connector Signal Remarks

INPUTL (2) (V100-1)N (1) (J100-4)

E (TB13)

AC input Single phase input, via filter.

OUTPUT +28 V dc(GSM900)

OR

+26 V dc(DCS1800)

For distribution to the amplifiers.

J301-1

J301-2J300-1

J300-2

J301-3

J301-4

J300-3

J300-4

OUTPUTJ300-S

J301-S

0 V dc

+12 V dc

For distribution to the amplifiers.

For distribution to the amplifiers and thealarm board.




68P02902W62-O

20th Sep 02


68P02902W62-O i

Chapter 4

Digital modules

GSM-209-323

20th Sep 02ii


68P02902W62-O

GSM-209-323

20th Sep 02


68P02902W62-O iii

Chapter 4Digital modules i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Digital modules Tech. 4�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of digital modules Tech. 4�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RDIS module Tech. 4�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DINO/RHINO module Tech. 4�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HDSL module Tech. 4�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line termination modules Tech. 4�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .






GSM-209-323

20th Sep 02iv


68P02902W62-O

GSM-209-323 Digital modules

20th Sep 02


68P02902W62-O Tech. 4�1

Digital modules

Overview ofdigital modules

The digital modules within Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 consist of thefollowing:

S Radio digital interface system (RDIS) module.

S DINO/RHINO module.

S High speed digital subscriber line (HDSL) module.

S Line termination modules.

RDIS moduleThe RDIS is the digital control module containing the main control unit micro(MCU-m) and the olympus radio architecture controller (ORAC). The MCU-m iscustomized to drive two ORACs, each support a single GSM RF carrier.

The RDIS provides the processing platform for the control software, the mainsoftware functions being:

S Call processing (CP).

S Cell resource manager (CRM).

S Radio resource state machine (RRSM).

S Switching.

S Support of DTRX � connection is made to two ORACs.

DINO/RHINOmodule

The DINO/RHINO module provides the functionality required to interface withthe network. The DINO/RHINO supports E1 interfaces.

HDSL moduleThe HDSL module enables E1 data rates to be transmitted as payloads sharedover two twisted-pair cables.


Line terminationmodules

The following modules are used to terminate the 2.048 Mbit/s (E1) links andHDSL 135 ohm links:

S DINO termination module - 120 ohm (DINO E1/HDSL module).

S RHINO termination module - 75 ohm (RHINO E1/HDSL module).

GSM-209-323Main control unit, micro (MCU-m)



68P02902W62-O

Main control unit, micro (MCU-m)

Overview ofMCU-m

The main control unit, micro (MCU-m) module provides the following functions:

S Control processing.

S Crosspoint switch.

S BTS master clock synchronization.

S Timing.

S RSS processing (for both ORACs).

The processing supports the BTS site processing and fault management,together with BTS call processing (RRSM and CRM).

The crosspoint switch provides switching for the network interfaces and the twoORAC functional blocks.

Processorfunctionality

The MCU-m processing section provides a 68LC060 processor in companionmode with a QUICC32. The QUICC32 is used to provide system integration andperipheral functions, specifically, a 32 channel HDLC controller for theDTRX-BCF links.

The main processing section of the MCU-m currently supports 16 Mbytes ofRAM.

The DRAM system implements an ECC system for high data integrity.

The boot up code is stored in a 2 Mbyte flash EPROM. A further 1 Mbyte offlash EPROM is provided for non volatile data storage.

A code storage facility processor (CSFP) is supported via a PCMCIA interface.This allows flash memory cards of various sizes to be fitted.

68LC060processor

The 68LC060 has a clock operating speed of 50 MHz with a bus speed of25 MHz (the reduced bus speed is due to the use of the QUICC32 in companionmode).

The on-board memory management unit (MMU) provides write protection ofmemory areas, particularly program storage areas.

GSM-209-323 Main control unit, micro (MCU-m)

20th Sep 02


68P02902W62-O Tech. 4�3

QUICC32processor

The QUICC32 processor is a pin compatible derivative of the 68360. There areminor hardware changes and microcode changes which permit the serialcommunications channel (SCCI) to operate as a 32 channel HDLC controller,utilizing the CPM RISC controller to perform the processing.

The QUICC32 processor operates at 25 MHz. This also defines the external busspeed of the 68LC060 processor.

The on-board system integration features of the QUICC32 provide peripheralcontrol functions to support the 68LC060 processor.

MCU-m blockdiagram

Figure 4-1 shows a functional block diagram of the MCU-m module.

FAST FLASH(BOOTCODE &

EXECUTIVE)

SLOW FLASH(SWFM)

16MbDRAM

ECC

DATA

ADDRESS

BERR

PLL

RESETLOGIC

RS232

CROSSPOINTSWITCH

1

CONTROLBTP

(68LC060)

COMMSPROCESSOR

(QUICC32)

XTAL

PCMCIA

MMI1

SIGNAL CONNECTOR

SYSTEMRESET AND

MASTERPROCESSOR

WARMRESET (FROM

DINO/RHINO)

DINO/RHINOLINKS

ORAC � 2LINKS

EXTRACTEDCLOCKS

FROMDINO/RHINO

PCMCIAINTERFACE

SYNC

2

2

SITEID

2

Figure 4-1 MCU-m functional block diagram

GSM-209-323Main control unit, micro (MCU-m)



68P02902W62-O

PCMCIAinterface

The loading and storage of software may be done via the PCMCIA interface.

The PCMCIA socket is an industry standard 68-pin single socket, accessiblefrom the underside of the enclosure when the MMI cover plate is removed.

The PCMCIA interface is controlled using a Cirrus Logic PC card socketcontroller. The PCMCIA interface is provided to support rev 2.1 type I cards.

Crosspointswitch

This application specific integrated circuit (ASIC) provides central switchingcapabilities for the MCU-m. It switches TDM links between two ORACs, twonetwork interfaces and two links to the processing section, one link to the syncprocessor and also two links for the expansion fibre optics.

The ASIC also provides link interface features associated with the ORAC links,these include synchronization features to allow for delay in the link to the ORAC,and the necessary framing and encoding to support the link.

All of the serial links into the ASIC are E1, 125 ms frame, 32 eight-bit timeslotsper frame.

Sync blockThe sync block is responsible for site synchronization functions. It generates allrequired local references from a high stability local clock source, taking 15minutes to stabilize from warm-up. This clock source may also be locked to theincoming network clocks.

The sync block provides the following reference pulses and reference clock:

S 16.384 MHz

S 125 ms

S 60 ms

S 6.12 s

The sync function is controlled by the main processing section via a parallelport.

The clock select block receives all of the possible sources of reference signal:

S Extracted clock from the DINO/RHINO.

One of the sources is selected as a reference and up to two others can bemonitored and prioritized as backup references should the primary reference fail.

The sync block can also operate in free-running mode, using the ovenizedvoltage controlled crystal oscillator (OCXO).

NOTE The OXCO requires calibration when the frame-slip alarmthreshold is exceeded. This should only occur a few timesin the life of the equipment, due to the slow ageingcharacteristic of the OCXO.

The PLL uses the selected reference signal as the loop reference clock. Itincludes an OCXO (accurate to 0.05 ppm), a phase comparator and a loop filter.

GSM-209-323 Main control unit, micro (MCU-m)

20th Sep 02


68P02902W62-O Tech. 4�5

MMI interfaceThe main processing section is provided with a TTY interface to the QUICC32.This interface does not support hardware handshaking. The serial ports supporta baud rate of 9.6 kbit/s (no parity, 1 stop bit, 8 bits per character).

Electronicboard ID

Electronic board ID is supported by the slow flash memory (non-volatile datamemory). This storage contains the following information:

S RDIS module serial number � 16 bytes.

S Kit number � 16 bytes.

S Description � 32 bytes.

Electronic siteID andcalibration data

A programmable site ID feature is provided using a serial EPROM.

Memory systemThe RDIS has on-board memory devices and associated circuitry which is usedto enable initialization of the ORAC and DTRX, and store the site ID.

Functional description and diagramThe memory system consists of three memory blocks and some arbitration logic,as shown in Figure 4-2.

The ORAC and DTRX memory contains calibration and information dataassociated with the cabinet equipment.

The arbitration logic allows the exchange of the DTRX/ORAC memoryinformation between the two ORACs.

The MCU-m memory contains the site identification number and the kit numberof the board on which it is stored. This information can be read via the MCU-mat the TTY plug.

SITEEEPROM

MCU-m

ARBITRATIONLOGIC

ORACEEPROM

RDIS

DTRXEEPROM

ORAC0

ORAC1

Figure 4-2 EEPROM functional block diagram

GSM-209-323Olympus radio architecture controller (ORAC) function



68P02902W62-O

Olympus radio architecture controller (ORAC) function

Overview ofORAC

Each ORAC is part of the RDIS and is designed to support a single, dual-ratebasic GSM RF carrier.

ORACfunctionalblocks

Each ORAC consists of the following functional blocks:

ORAC system controller and router (OSCAR) processor

The OSCAR processor performs the control functions for the OSCAR to MCU-minterface, channel codec control, TTY link and PA control.

Equalizer

The equalizer performs channel equalisation for a single RF carrier.

Channel codecs

The channel codecs perform:

S Channel coding/decoding.

S Interleaving/de-interleaving.

S Speech transacting.

Transceiver interface control (TIC)

The TIC performs low level management of the DTRX:

S A/D conversion.

S Modulation/demodulation control.

S Tx power control.

S Synthesizer interface.

Serial communications interface (SCI)

Slow serial interface for TTY and control.

Synchronous serial interface (SSI)

Fast serial interface for communication between DSPs.

The functional blocks above are shown in Figure 4-3, the lines representing theinterfaces between the main processing sections of the module. The channelcodec blocks and equalizer block contain multiple processors.

GSM-209-323 Olympus radio architecture controller (ORAC) function

20th Sep 02


68P02902W62-O Tech. 4�7

TTY/SCI

Each processor has a TTY port available; for example the OSCAR, channelcodecs and equalizer.

The Horizoncompact2 booster internal alarms flexi-cable connects from the9-way alarms input through to the test TTY access port (connection is made toeach ORAC).

ORACfunctionaldiagram

Figure 4-3 shows a functional block diagram of the ORAC module.

OSCARPROCESSOR

TDMINTERFACE

ITC ASIC

EQUALIZER

CHANNELCODECS

SCI

TRAFFIC SSI LINK

UPLINKBUS

2 MBit/s TDMDATA

SCI

SCI (MMI)ROUTEINGINTERFACE

SCI

OSCAR TTY

To MCU-mSECTION

DTRXMODULE

PRIVATE BUS

CONTROLBUS

SSI

PARALLEL BUS(HOST INTERFACE)From MCU-m

SECTION

Tx

Rx

TEST TTYACCESS

(BOOSTERALARMS)

Figure 4-3 ORAC functional block diagram

GSM-209-323DINO/RHINO module



68P02902W62-O

DINO/RHINO module

Overview ofDINO/RHINO

The DINO/RHINO module provides the interface to the network. This function isseparated from the MCU-m section of RDIS due to the variety of interfaces thatcan be provided.

S The DINO board provides a 120 ohm twisted pair E1 or 135 ohm twistedpair HDSL interface.

S The RHINO board provides a 75 ohm coax E1 or 135 ohm twisted pairHDSL interface.

A local microcontroller is provided for network interface configuration andsupervision. This is controlled by the MCU-m and communicates with theDINO/RHINO microcontroller via a HDLC link.

Location ofDINO/RHINO

The DINO/RHINO module is fitted between the RDIS and DTRX modules.

Figure 4-4 shows the location of the optional DINO/RHINO module (whichincorporates the LIU) and HDSL modules.

(DTRX OMITTED FOR CLARITY)DINO/RHINO

HDSLMODEMS

FIBRE OPTICCONNECTORS

FOR EXPANSIONCONNECTIONS

ig.084.rh

Figure 4-4 DINO/RHINO location

GSM-209-323 DINO/RHINO module

20th Sep 02


68P02902W62-O Tech. 4�9

Module view ofDINO/RHINO

Figure 4-5 shows a DINO/RHINO module and an external view of the TTYconnector with switches on the MMI cover plate.

R

ig.085.rh

HDSLMODULES

RDISCONNECTOR

NETWORKINTERFACE

MODULE

TTY CONNECTOR(MMI OF RDIS)

LINE TERMINATIONMODULE

SYSTEM RESETBUTTON (S1)

GREEN LED

MASTERPROCESSORWARM RESETBUTTON (S2)

FIBRE OPTICCONNECTORS(FOR MASTER

AND SLAVE FRUCONNECTIONS)

MMI COVER PLATE

Figure 4-5 DINO/RHINO with HDSL modules and TTY connector and switches




68P02902W62-O

DINO/RHINOfunctionaldiagram

Figure 4-6 identifies the functional blocks in the DINO/RHINO.

BOARD CONNECTORS

CONTROLPROCESSOR

FLASH EPROM

DRAM

DATA

ADDRESSRS232

BDM

HDSLMODULE

XTAL

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ

LIU

DISTANCEMEASURING,

PATTERNINSERT AND

DETECT

MCU-mRESET

SWITCH

LINK 0

LINK 1

REF_125mSREF_6.12S

MUXDEMUX

2.048 MBIT/S

RESET

MAIN

NETWORKLINK 0

SYSTEMRESET (S1)

GREEN LED

COUNTER

FRAMER

STOP

START

STROBE

2.048 MBIT/S

PROCESSOR BUS

J3

J6

J3

GND

J8

HDSLLINK 1

DATA/CLK

DATA/CLK

DUART

LIU

DINO/RHINORXD

DINO/RHINOTXD

GND

HLI

HLI

HDSLMODULE

HDSLLINK 2

FRAMER

J9

J8

J4 (DINO)

BOARD CONNECTORS

NETWORKLINK 1

CONTROL

CONTROLSYSTEMRESET

MASTER PROCESSORWARM RESET (S2)

DINO/RHINORXD

DINO/RHINOTXD

MMICONNECTOR

MMITTY

J14/J15/16/17

RDIS

TO

E1

TO

E1

TO

9-WAY(J4)

(RHINO)

Figure 4-6 DINO/RHINO functional block diagram


20th Sep 02


68P02902W62-O Tech. 4�11

Processingsection ofDINO/RHINO

The processing section comprises a MC68360 microcontroller with 8 Mbit (256kx 32 words) DRAM and 8 Mbit (512k x 16 words) flash EPROM. The flashmemory is partitioned into two banks of 256k x 16 words to assist in codecorruption immunity (CCI). Both banks of memory contain the same operationalcode in order to allow the processor to boot from either bank (redundant ormain). This is a safety procedure, in the event of code becoming corrupted. Theprocessor provides integrated features such that it requires little peripheralsupport. It communicates with the MCU-m via a HDLC link.

Flash EPROM

The flash EEPROM stores the following:

S Boot code.

S Operational code.

S Electronic ID.

The boot code executes on reset, performing board level tests beforetransferring execution to the operational code.

The operational code will then allow the HDLC link to the MCU-m to beestablished. The MCU-m may then request a code load of the DINO/RHINO tobe performed.

Electronic ID

The electronic board ID stores the following information:

S Board serial number � 16 bytes.

S Board kit number � 16 bytes.

TTY port

The TTY connector (J7) on the DINO/RHINO is the master processor/MCU-mTTY port. A TTY for debugging the DINO/RHINO is available on the RDIS testconnector.

LED status

Table 4-1 displays the system status LED.

Table 4-1 System status LED

Green LED Status

Off System power off

On System power on




68P02902W62-O

Resets

The processor is capable of soft resetting itself. A local power-on reset circuit isprovided. This provides a local reset based on the power supply tolerance.

The MCU-m is able to reset the DINO/RHINO via a message on the HDLC linkonly.

Reset switches

There are two push button switches mounted on the DINO/RHINO board whichprovides the following:

S System reset (S1)

When depressed briefly and then released, on board circuitry provides atimed hard reset of the DINO/RHINO board and RDIS board.

S Master processor warm reset (S2)

When depressed briefly and then released, on board circuitry provides awarm reset to the MCU-m section of the RDIS module.

The reset switches are located on the DINO/RHINO to provide better access tothis function when the system is fully configured in the chassis.

Line interfaceframers

The framing devices provide analogue to digital conversions for encode/decodeof the E1/T1 interfaces, and for HDSL modules when fitted and selected bysoftware (E1 only).

The framers provide the decoded and jitter attenuated receive data, for passingto the MCU-m, plus a version of the data that has not been through the jitterbuffer which can be used on board the DINO/RHINO for distance measurement.

NOTE Although distance measuring can be made operational, itis not a feature of current software.

The framers provide a 2.048 MHz extracted clock, passed to the MCU-m. Thetransmit and receive framing is controlled by a 125 ms reference pulse receivedfrom the MCU-m.


20th Sep 02


68P02902W62-O Tech. 4�13

Radio signallinglinks

The radio signalling links (RSLs) to the BSC from the main processor on theMCU-m are 64 kbit/s or 16 kbit/s LAPD links. The MCU-m does not perform theLAPD encoding of the RSL link data. This is performed on the DINO/RHINO bythe processor.

The DINO/RHINO supports a maximum of two RSL links. The RSL links mayboth be on a single network link or shared between the two network links.

NOTE When the DINO/RHINO is on a network link to a BSC, theRSL can be placed on either line on any timeslot otherthan zero.

The DINO/RHINO supports 64 kbit/s and 16 kbit/s LAPD channels.

HDSL interface

Control

The HDSL modules are controlled from the processor by an asynchronous serialdata stream. There are two separate control channels, one per HDSL module.The control streams are sourced by a dual universal asynchronous receivertransmitter (DUART) device on the processor bus of the DINO/RHINO.

Clock and data

The HDSL module interfaces directly to the framer interface/framer devices. TheHDSL sourced data is selected as the input and output data path by the controlprocessor. Both clock and data are used in both transmit and receive directions.

GSM-209-323High speed digital subscriber line (HDSL) module



68P02902W62-O

High speed digital subscriber line (HDSL) module

Overview ofHDSL


The HDSL module enables E1 data rates to be transmitted as payloads sharedover two twisted-pair cables. These cables are generally unshielded standardtelephone cables.

Functionaldescription ofHDSL

The HDSL data operates bidirectionally over each twisted-pair at approximatelyhalf the overall E1 data rate.

The module processor performs such tasks as error monitoring and start-upconfiguration. The processor also communicates with the DINO/RHINOprocessor via an asynchronous control port.

The raw HDSL signals from the module are routed through the DINO/RHINOand then translated at the HLI functional block (see Figure 4-6) into true HDSLlevel signals.

Functionaldiagram ofHDSL

Figure 4-7 shows the HDSL module functional blocks.

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ

ANALOGUEFRONT END

ANALOGUEFRONT END

DSP

DSP

HDSLFRAMER

PROCESSOR

FLASH

NVRAM

CLOCK

DATA

CLOCK

DATA

CONTROL

BIDIRECTIONALBALANCED LINE TO HLI

BIDIRECTIONALBALANCED LINE TO HLI

Figure 4-7 HDSL module functional block

GSM-209-323 Line termination modules

20th Sep 02


68P02902W62-O Tech. 4�15

Line termination modules

Overview of lineterminationmodules

The following modules are used to terminate the 2.048 Mbit/s (E1) links andhigh speed digital subscriber line (HDSL) 135 ohm links:

S DINO termination module - 120 ohm (DINO E1/HDSL module).

S RHINO termination module - 75 ohm (RHINO E1/HDSL module).

Connectorlocationdiagram

Figure 4-8 shows the DINO/RHINO connectors and location of the linetermination module.

J15 J16J14 J17 J13

DINO (E1/HDSL) RHINO (E1/HDSL)

J12J11

INTERNALSLAVE

INTERNALMASTER

HDSL OPTIONA B

TXRX

TXRX

PORT PIN1 & 6

2 & 73 & 84 & 9

PORT PINDINO LABEL

ALARMHDSL OPTION

INTERNAL SLAVE

INTERNAL MASTERTX RX TX RX

A A B B

RHINO LABEL

LINE TERMINATION MODULE(RHINO SHOWN)


ALARM

J13 J12

J3 (MMI)

J13 J12J17J16J15J14

J11

(ACTIVE ONHORIZONCOMPACT2

ONLY)

J12J13

Figure 4-8 Connector location diagram

GSM-209-323Line termination modules



68P02902W62-O

Terminology forTx and Rx

The use of Tx and Rx as driver/receiver designators refer to the network asperceived by the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 enclosure:

S Tx indicates the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 connection is drivinginto the network.

S Rx indicates the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 connection isreceiving from the network.

Features of lineterminationmodules

The line termination modules provide:

S Impedance matching between the E1 and HDSL circuit lines and theDINO/RHINO module.

S An interface for up to two inputs and two outputs (120 ohm balancedDINO or 75 ohm unbalanced RHINO E1 lines), or two HDSL 135 ohmlooped pairs.

HDSL linkoptions

In HDSL equipped variants, the links are automatically configured as either E1or HDSL via a combination of database settings and auto-detectionmechanisms.

A feature of GSR4 software and later releases enables the setting of themaster/slave defaults to be changed by database settings for scenarios wherethe defaults are not appropriate, such as a closed loop daisy chain. In thisinstance, an external modem from the BSC must be a slave. The slave modemon the last Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 must be turned into a master inorder to communicate with the BSC. (See the configuration example later in thissection.)

NOTE Software releases prior to GSR4 cannot access the abovefeature.

Links can be either E1 or HDSL, and can be mixed as appropriate within thenetwork. Conversion to/from E1 and HDSL can be performed either at aHorizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 or by use of external HDSL modems.

Three examples of possible configurations are shown below.

GSM-209-323 Line termination modules

20th Sep 02


68P02902W62-O Tech. 4�17

E1 link connection to BSC

In this configuration (see Figure 4-9) an E1 link is used from the BSC to the firstHorizonmicro2 (BTS ) or Horizoncompact2 (BTS). Here, the connection is madeto the J11 port in the DINO board or to one of the coaxial cable connectors (J14,J15, J16, or J17) on the RHINO board. From the first BTS onwards, HDSL linksare used running from slave port (DINO/RHINO J13) to the master port(DINO/RHINO J12) in each BTS.

On the DINO/RHINO boards there are two fibre optic channels of 2.048 Mbit/s,allowing two further BTSs to be interconnected. The fibre optic channel allowssynchronization of the slave BTSs with the master BTS.

M = MASTER S = SLAVE

M S MS

BSC

E1 LINK

HDSL LINKHDSL LINK

BTS BTS BTS

NOTE The remaining link on the last BTS could be used toperform a closed loop configuration with an E1 link.


S

BSC

E1 LINKFIBRE OPTIC

LINKSM

FIBRE OPTICLINK

BTS BTS BTS

Figure 4-9 HDSL and fibre optic interconnections

GSM-209-323Line termination modules



68P02902W62-O

External modem connection to BSC

In this configuration (see Figure 4-10), a BSC connects to an external modemthrough an E1 link. A connection is then made from the external modem slaveport to the master port (DINO/RHINO J12) on the Horizonmicro2 orHorizoncompact2 DINO/RHINO. The slave port of the BTS (DINO/RHINO J13),connects to the next BTS master port (DINO/RHINO J12) and so on, until thelast BTS port is connected.


HDSLMSLAVE MS MS

BSC

HDSL HDSLE1 LINK

BTS BTS BTSEXTERNAL

MODEM

NOTE Contact the local Motorola office for assistance prior topurchasing a HDSL modem for use with Horizonmicro2 orHorizoncompact2 BTSs.

Figure 4-10 External modem connection to BSC

External modem connection to BSC (closed loop)

This closed loop configuration (see Figure 4-11) uses external modems throughan E1 link in order to connect to the BSC. A connection is made from theexternal modem slave port to the master port on the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 (DINO/RHINO J12). The slave port of the BTS (DINO J1,RHINO J13), connects to the next BTS master port (DINO/RHINO J12) and soon, until the last BTS port is connected.

The slave port on the last BTS (DINO/RHINO J13), is reconfigured via softwareto be a master port. The reconfiguration of the port (DINO/RHINO J13) on thelast BTS allows the loop to be closed via the use of an external HDSL modem.

HDSL HDSL HDSL

SLAVEE1 LINK

E1 LINKSLAVE

HDSL

M M M MSS


BSC

EXTERNALMODEM

BTS BTS BTS

EXTERNALMODEM

Figure 4-11 External modem connection to BSC (closed loop)

NOTE Software releases prior to GSR4 cannot access the aboveclosed loop configuration.Contact the local Motorola office for assistance prior topurchasing a HDSL modem.

20th Sep 02


68P02902W62-O i

Chapter 5

RF modules

GSM-209-323

20th Sep 02ii


68P02902W62-O

GSM-209-323

20th Sep 02


68P02902W62-O iii

Chapter 5RF modules i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview of RF modules Tech. 5�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction Tech. 5�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location diagram Tech. 5�2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .





GSM-209-323

20th Sep 02iv


68P02902W62-O

GSM-209-323 Overview of RF modules

20th Sep 02


68P02902W62-O Tech. 5�1

Overview of RF modules

Introduction

The RF modules consist of:

S Dual transceiver module (DTRX).

S Isolator modules.

NOTE To avoid problems with dust contamination of the fibreoptics it is very important that the dust covers are kept inplace on the fibre optic plugs at all times the cables arenot connected.Please strictly observe the warning label affixed on theDTRX module.

GSM-209-323Overview of RF modules



68P02902W62-O

Locationdiagram

Figure 5-1 shows the location of the RF modules on the Horizonmicro2 andHorizoncompact2.

RX/TX1/TX2CABLE

CONNECTOR

DTRX MODULEISOLATOR/COMBINER

MODULE AND DUPLEXER

AC-DC POWERSUPPLYMODULE

RDISMODULE


AC POWER SOCKET

TX1 CABLE CONNECTOR RX CABLE

CONNECTOR

TX2 CABLE CONNECTOR

DTRX MODULEINCORPORATING

ISOLATOR MODULE

AC-DC POWERSUPPLYMODULE

RDISMODULE

(External N-type

RF connector)(External N-type

RF connector)


AC POWER SOCKET

DUMMY CONNECTORSHorizonmicro2

MASTERSLAVE

Horizoncompact2

Figure 5-1 RF module locations

GSM-209-323 Dual transceiver (DTRX) module

20th Sep 02


68P02902W62-O Tech. 5�3

Dual transceiver (DTRX) module

Overview ofDTRX module

The DTRX module supports dual RF transceivers which operate in either theGSM900 or DCS1800 frequency bands.

The DTRX module supports synthesizer frequency hopping (SFH) and dynamicpower control (but not for the BCCH carrier). The DTRX module does notsupport base band hopping or receive spatial diversity.

Synthesizersection

Introduction

The synthesizer blocks are located with the Rx and Tx circuits and used for theRF and IF frequency synthesis.

There are a total of 13 phase-lock loops required on the DTRX module, eightfrequency synthesizers and five phase-locked oscillators. The phase-lockedoscillators are used for the IF local oscillators. The master 13 MHz referenceoscillator is phase-locked to a 16.384 MHz reference supplied from the RDISdigital module and, together with digital dividers, provides reference frequenciesfor all other PLLs. The subsystem supports synthesizer frequency hopping(SFH).

Functional description

The phase-locked loops of the DTRX module are:

S 13 MHz master reference.

S Transmit RF frequency synthesizer (TXRFLO) x4.

S Transmit IF phase-locked oscillator (TXIFLO) x2.

S Receive RF frequency synthesizer (RXRFLO) x4.

S Receive IF phase-locked oscillator (RXIFLO) x2.

13 MHz reference distribution

The purpose of the reference distribution is to generate and distribute referencesignals of the correct frequency and amplitude to all the synthesizers andoscillators on the DTRX module. A synchronizing 13 MHz clock is returned tothe RDIS digital module.

RF synthesizers

The operation of the eight RF synthesizers supplying the Rx and Tx chains areidentical. They are combined in pairs to enable SFH. Whilst one of the pair ofsynthesizers is providing the local oscillator, the other is locking to the nextchannel in the frequency hopping sequence.

GSM-209-323Dual transceiver (DTRX) module



68P02902W62-O

IF oscillators

The four IF oscillators are basically the same but the transmit and receivesynthesizers use different reference frequencies and phase detectorcomparison frequencies.

Alarms

Synthesizer alarms are:

S Tx synthesizer lock alarm.

S Rx synthesizer lock alarm.

S 13 MHz synthesizer lock.

Synthesizer functional block diagram

Figure 4-8 shows the synthesizer functional blocks.

RXIFLO(Carrier 0)200 kHz Reference

REFERENCESYNTHESIZER

16.348 MHz CLOCK(from RDIS)

13 MHz Reference(to RDIS)

IFINJECTION

PLO

IFINJECTION

PLO

1 MHz Reference

IFINJECTION

PLO

IFINJECTION

PLO

RXIFLO(Carrier 1)

TXIFLO(Carrier 0)

TXIFLO(Carrier 1)

TXRFLO(Carrier 1)

(A)

RFINJECTION

PLL

RFINJECTION

PLL

RFINJECTION

PLL

RFINJECTION

PLL

TXRFLO(Carrier 1)

(B)

RXRFLO(Carrier 1)

(A)

RXRFLO(Carrier 1)

(B)

TXRFLO(Carrier 0)

(A)13 MHz Reference

RFINJECTION

PLL

RFINJECTION

PLL

13 MHz Reference

RFINJECTION

PLL

RFINJECTION

PLL

TXRFLO(Carrier 0)

(B)

RXRFLO(Carrier 0)

(A)

RXRFLO(Carrier 0)

(B)

DIVIDEby 5

DIVIDEby 13

13 MHz Reference

13 MHz Reference

Figure 5-2 Synthesizer functional block diagram


20th Sep 02


68P02902W62-O Tech. 5�5

Receiversection

Introduction to the receiver

The receiver is a double conversion super-heterodyne that can operate in twomodes; linear and limiting. When the receiver is looking for call initiation from amobile station on a RACH, it is switched to limiting mode as no estimate ofsignal strength is available to set the AGC pads. In normal operation on aSDCCH or TCH, the receiver operates in linear mode. This allows the amplitudeinformation to be retained, which is required by the channel equalizers.




68P02902W62-O

Functional description of the receiver

In the Horizonmicro2 both Rx and Tx use a common antenna and so a duplexeris used to provide isolation between them. The response of the duplexer alsoacts as preselection for the low noise amplifier (LNA). This stage is missingwithin the Horizoncompact2 as the duplexer is found within the booster, thusonly one signal passes directly into the LNA.

The RF signal passes through an LNA stage and then through a splitter. Onearm feeds carrier 0 whilst the other feeds carrier 1. A bandpass filter providesrejection to out-of-band blockers. The mixer down-converts the signal to an IFusing a low-side RXRFLO. A diplexer at the output of the mixer provides awideband match to the mixer to prevent reflections causing unwanted spurioussignals. An AGC pad is available at this point to reduce the dynamic rangerequirement for the IF strip.

Three SAW filters provide some channel filtering, reject the unwanted mixercomponents and ease the 3rd order intermodulation products (IP3)requirements of the backend. The IF signal is then amplified and split into twopaths; one is the limited path, the other is the linear path. The limited signal canbe switched back into the main signal path.

During linear operation, the magnitude of the baseband output (I+Q) ismonitored to feed back to the AGC algorithm, ensuring that the basebandoutput is maintained at the required level. However, in limiting operation, themagnitude of baseband output (I+Q) does not reflect the incoming signalstrength due to the operation of the hard limiter. The signal strength can bederived, however, by monitoring the output of the limiters RSSI port.

The dynamic range of the receiver is �107 dBm to �15 dBm. There is aswitchable 40 dB pad (known as AGC7) at the front of the IF strip which reducesthe compression of the IF strip to an achievable level. The baseband output tothe A/D converters is ideally maintained at 1/2 full scale (2.5 V pk�pk or12 dBm) using the AGC pads which are controlled by the equalizer algorithmand set by AGC calibration. AGC7 effectively reduces the dynamic range for theremainder of the receiver from �107 dBm to �55 dBm. Hence there is aremaining 49 dB of AGC requirement to be taken up in AGC0�6. This isprovided by a voltage variable amplifier which is controlled by a DAC from theAGC word.

The active demodulator provides I & Q channel data at baseband by usingRXIFLO from the synthesizer at twice the required LO frequency. The basebandprocessing then filters the demodulated signal to reject the adjacent channelsand to band limit the noise power. The signal is also amplified to the levelrequired by the A/D converter. Also included is a group delay equalizer whichflattens the variation caused by the baseband filtering.


20th Sep 02


68P02902W62-O Tech. 5�7

Functional block diagram

Figure 5-3 shows the CARRIER 0 receiver path of the DTRX module. TheCARRIER 1 receiver path is identical after the LNAs and splitter.

LNA1

CARRIER 1 PATH

RXRFLOTEMPERATURE

DETECTOR

RF FILTER MIXER1

DIPLEXER

AGC7 0/40 dB

SAW

SWITCH

I & QDEMOD

90_

RXIFLO

Rx_TEMP_0

LIMIT/LOGAMP

RSSI_0

CALAGC1b

CALAGC

I_0

Q_0

Rx_IN

SAW SAW

CALAGC1a

AMP1

AGCAMP

AMP2

AMP3

AMP4

50Ohms

BPF

LNA2

LPF

I BRANCH

Q BRANCH

BASEBANDPROCESSING

Rx_IN

HORIZONCOMPACT2

HORIZONMICRO2

DUPLEXER

Figure 5-3 Rx functional block diagram




68P02902W62-O

Transmittersection

Introduction to the transmitter

The transmitter section of the DTRX module takes in digital information from theRDIS module and oscillator and reference signals from the synthesizer section.It generates the IF, mixes it with the LO and amplifies the resultant RF signal.The final RF signal is fully modulated, filtered, power ramped and amplified.

In the Horizonmicro2 the output signal passes to enclosure equipment whichcomprises the duplexer and combiner/isolator module.

In the Horizoncompact2 each of the output signals from Tx1 and Tx2 arepassed through two separate isolators before being forwarded to theHorizoncompact2 booster for amplification.


20th Sep 02


68P02902W62-O Tech. 5�9

Functional description of the transmitter

The transmitter (Tx) takes digital baseband information from the RDIS moduleand converts it into a GMSK modulated signal. This modulated signal is mixedwith the TXIFLO input, up-converted to the first IF, 175 MHz, then passedthrough:

S An amplification and narrow band filtering stage to remove unwantedsidebands (due to mixing of signals).

S A voltage variable attenuator (VVA) which provides signal level adjustmentunder control of the RDIS module (to compensate for power levelchanges).

S A voltage controlled amplifier (VCA) which provides more than 45 dB ofpower control (to ramp the signal up and down).

S An amplification and wideband filtering stage before being mixed with theTXRFLO input and being up-converted to the final RF frequency.

After the second mixer, the signal is amplified and filtered before being passedthrough the second VVA. The function of this VVA is the same as the first. Itforms part of a control loop in conjunction with the power detector. Both VVAsare also used to adjust the power output of the system, to account for theduplexer and combiner/isolator module.

The signal is further amplified and filtered before being passed through a digitalswitched attenuator (DSA). This attenuator provides up to 30 dB of attenuationin discrete 2 dB steps, and is used for static/dynamic power control. It iscontrolled by signals from the RDIS module.

In the Horizonmicro2 a RF power amplifier (PA) module with preceding stages ofamplification increases the signal level up to approximately 30.8 dBm �+/�2.0 dB (GSM900 normal operation) or 30.0 dBm +/�2.0 dB (DCS1800normal operation).

In the Horizoncompact2 a RF power amplifier (PA) module with precedingstages of amplification increases the signal level up to approximately 31.2 dBm �+/�1.5 dB (GSM900 normal operation) or 33.4 dBm +/�1.5 dB (DCS1800normal operation).

A RF power detector monitors the power output, giving a usable output over35 dB of range. The detector is temperature compensated. A temperaturesensor is fitted to allow the RDIS module to determine the temperature of the PAmodule, for thermal protection.




68P02902W62-O

Functional block diagram

Figure 5-4 shows the CARRIER 0 transmitter path of the DTRX module. TheCARRIER 1 transmitter path is identical.

GAINBLOCK

VCANARROWBAND

MIXER7 MHz

TXIFLO

PWR_RAMP_0

DIGITAL CONTROL SIGNAL

TXRFLO

TX_KEY

PWR_LEVEL_0

BPF

AMPLIFIER

RF POWERDETECTOR

Tx_OUT_0

Voltage VariableAttenuator

DigitalSwitchedAttenuator

GMSKMDATA

CLOCK

ENABLE

SAWBPF

SAWBPF

VVAPASSIVELPF

DSA

BPFBPF VVA

MIXER

BPF

DIVIDER

RF PAModule

TEMPERATUREDETECTOR Tx_TEMP

FWD_PWR_0

175 MHz

AMPLIFIER

AMPLIFIER

Figure 5-4 Tx functional block diagram


20th Sep 02


68P02902W62-O Tech. 5�11

Temperaturedetectors

The purpose of the temperature detection is to allow the RDIS module tocompensate for the temperature response of the DTRX module.

The DTRX module is equipped with four temperature detectors. Two sensorsare placed to detect the ambient temperature of the receivers and two placed todetect the temperature of the transmitter output stages.

The outputs of the four detectors are then multiplexed onto two analoguedetector lines selected by the TEMP_SEL control line (0 selects the transmitterand 1 selects the receiver). All the temperature sensors are identical and sharecommon switching and signal connection circuitry.

TEMP_SEL is changed only on timeslot boundaries and is sent with the AGCdata through a serial link back to the RDIS.

Functional block diagram of temperature detectors

Figure 5-5 shows a functional block diagram of the temperature detectors.

TRANSMITTERTEMPERATURE

DETECTOR

RECEIVERTEMPERATURE

DETECTOR

CARRIER 1

CARRIER 0 TEMP_SEL_0

CARRIER 0

CARRIER 1

TRANSMITTERTEMPERATURE

DETECTOR

RECEIVERTEMPERATURE

DETECTORTEMP_SEL_1

TEMP_DET_1

TEMP_DET_0

ANALOGUESWITCH

Figure 5-5 Temperature detectors functional block diagram

Non volatilestorage ofcalibration data

The DTRX factory calibration data, which is controlled and used by the RDISmodule, is stored in a 32 kbit (4 x 8 kbit) serial programmed EEPROM. This datais calibrated at manufacture.

GSM-209-323Horizonmicro2 duplexer and combiner/isolator



68P02902W62-O

Horizonmicro2 duplexer and combiner/isolator

Overview of theduplexer andcombiner/isolator

The duplexer filters Tx and Rx signals between a single antenna and the DTRX.

The Tx combiner/isolator module is used to combine the two transmit signaloutputs into the duplexer and hence to one antenna.

Location of theduplexer andcombiner/isolator

Figure 5-6 shows the location of the duplexer, combiner/isolator module andDTRX board on the Horizonmicro2..

COMBINER/ISOLATORMODULE

DUPLEXER

DTRX BOARDDUMMY CONNECTORS

RX/TX ANTENNACONNECTOR

Figure 5-6 Location of the duplexer and combiner/isolator modules onHorizonmicro2

GSM-209-323 Horizonmicro2 duplexer and combiner/isolator

20th Sep 02


68P02902W62-O Tech. 5�13

Duplexer andcombiner/isolatordiagrams

Figure 5-7 shows the duplexer and combiner/isolator modules.

DUPLEXER


Figure 5-7 Duplexer and combiner/isolator modules

Internal Rx/Txinterconnections

Figure 5-8 shows the DTRX Rx/Tx interconnections in a dual carrier system.

CARRIER 0

CARRIER 1COMBINED Tx

Rx


Tx

Tx

Tx

DUPLEXER

Tx

Rx

Tx OUT

Rx IN

DTRX

Tx OUT

Ae

Tx/Rx ANTENNA

Figure 5-8 Horizonmicro2 DTRX Rx/Tx interconnections diagram

GSM-209-323Horizoncompact2 isolators



68P02902W62-O

Horizoncompact2 isolators

Overview of theisolators

The isolators are high performance single stage directional Tx power modules,used in the Horizoncompact2. Due to its electromagnetic properties, it enables alow loss forward path through to the Horizoncompact2 booster Tx port andisolates in the reverse path.

This module provides isolation of multiple frequencies in the GSM900 andDCS1800 BTS to reduce intermodulation distortion. The isolator reducesreverse intermodulation by absorbing the power of an interferer into its internalload.

This module also prevents possible damage to the RF power amplifier resultingfrom load mismatches.

Location of theisolators

Figure 5-9 shows the location of the isolators and DTRX board on theHorizoncompact2.

ISOLATOR MODULESDTRX BOARD

N�TYPECONNECTORS

N�TYPECONNECTOR

Figure 5-9 Isolator locations on the Horizoncompact2

GSM-209-323 Horizoncompact2 isolators

20th Sep 02


68P02902W62-O Tech. 5�15

Isolator moduleview

Figure 5-10 shows the external view of the Horizoncompact2 isolator module.

Figure 5-10 Horizoncompact2 isolator module

Internal Rx/Txinterconnections

Figure 5-11 shows the DTRX Rx/Tx interconnections in a dual carrier system.

ISOLATORMODULE

Tx1

Tx2 OUT

Rx IN

DTRX

Tx1 OUT

ISOLATORMODULE

Tx1/RxANTENNA

Tx

DUPLEXER

Tx

Rx

ANT

Tx2ANTENNA

FILTER

BOOSTER

AMP

AMP

BTS

Tx1

Tx2Tx2ANT

Figure 5-11 Horizoncompact2 DTRX Rx/Tx interconnections diagram

GSM-209-323Booster



68P02902W62-O

Booster

Overview of thebooster

The Horizoncompact2 booster consists of two transmitter power amplifiers:

S When used with the Horizoncompact2 GSM900 BTS, boosts a 1.2 W(+30.8 dBm) per carrier output to 10 W (+40 dBm) per carrier.

S When used with the Horizoncompact2 DCS1800 BTS, boosts a 2 W(+33.0 dBm) per carrier output to 10 W (+40 dBm) per carrier.

The booster is intended to be mounted close to the Horizoncompact2 BTS andconnected through three two metre RF cables. The booster can be wall or polemounted.

Figure 5-12 shows a Horizoncompact2 with booster connected.

Horizoncompact2BOOSTER

ig .0 6 0 .rh

Horizoncompact2BTS



RF CABLING

RS232ALARM

LINK

Figure 5-12 Horizoncompact2 with booster unit

GSM-209-323 Booster

20th Sep 02


68P02902W62-O Tech. 5�17

Booster systemdescription

The Horizoncompact2 booster amplifies two independent RF carriers in thefrequency range of 925 to 960 MHz (GSM900) or 1805 to 1880 MHz(DCS1800). Each Tx input to the booster is a pulsed RF carrier. One of these Txcarriers could be used in frequency hopping mode.

When the downlink power control is employed in the associatedHorizoncompact2, the peak amplitude of the pulsed RF carrier at the boosterinputs can vary from +5 dBm to +30.8 dBm (GSM900) and from +2.5 dBm to+34.5 dBm (DCS1800).

The Horizoncompact2 booster gain remains constant when the RF input isreduced, so the booster RF output power is correspondingly reduced.

The attenuation through the receive (ANT1 only) is less than 1.0 dB.

GSM-209-323Booster



68P02902W62-O

Functionaldescription ofbooster

Referencing Figure 5-13, pulsed signals originating from Tx1 and Tx2 arecarried through relays under normal operation. In the event of a failure in eitheror both power amplifiers, a bypass mode is automatically enabled by thebooster once failure is detected. This feature enables switching a maximum of+41.25 dBm (GSM900) and +43 dBm (DCS1800) when RF power is applied tothe relay. One amplifier can remain operational whilst the other is in bypassmode. Both carriers remain operational in bypass mode.

From the switch, the pulsed signal arrives at the attenuator and local heat sink.The attenuator reduces a nominal 30.8 dBm by 2 dB to 28.8 dBm.

The pulsed signals are then passed to the linear power amplifiers (PAs) wherethey are boosted to 42 dBm (+/�1.25 dBm). A voltage of 28 V dc (GSM900) or26 V dc (DCS1800) is derived from the power supply to drive the poweramplifiers.

From the PAs, the pulsed signals are passed to the isolator. The isolator is adirectional power device which, due to its electromagnetic properties, enables alow loss forward path (0.3 dB) through to the next relay. The isolator preventsreverse intermodulation by absorbing the power of an interferer into its internalload so that it does not reach the power amplifier.

The pulsed signal is then passed through the second relay and on to the Txfilter or duplexer. From the filter or duplexer, the signal is routed to the antennas.

Modulated Rx signals arrive at antenna 1 and pass through the duplexer beforepassing to the Rx port.

ANT2

ANT1

ISOLATORRELAY TX FILTER

LINEAR PAATTENUATORRELAY

TX2

AC SUPPLY

ALARMS

AC/DC SUPPLY

ANDALARMS BOARD

ISOLATOR

RELAY DUPLEXERLINEAR PARELAY

BYPASS PATH

BYPASS PATH

TX1

RX

ATTENUATOR

+ 28 V dc (GSM900)

+ 28 V dc (GSM900) OR + 26 V dc (DCS1800)

+ 26 V dc (DCS1800)OR

Figure 5-13 Booster functional block diagram

GSM-209-323 Booster

20th Sep 02


68P02902W62-O Tech. 5�19

Bypass mode

In case of failure of either or both PAs inside the booster, there is an ability tobypass the amplifier which has failed. Bypass mode is automatically enabled bythe booster once the fault is detected. This feature requires that the boosterinternal RF relays are capable of switching a maximum of +41.25 dBm(GSM900) or +43 dBm (DCS1800) whilst the RF power is applied to the relay.Both carriers of the Horizoncompact2 remain operational in bypass mode. Ifthere is an ac failure both relays bypass the amplifiers.

Overtemperature protection is required such that it is not latching and hassufficient range to prevent rapid cycling of ON and OFF. There is noovertemperature signal passed to the Horizoncompact2 BTS.

Figure 5-14 shows a block diagram of the bypass feature.

ANT 2

ISOLATORRELAY TX FILTER

LINEAR PAATTENUATORRELAY

TX2 INPUT

BYPASS PATH

Figure 5-14 Bypass feature

Booster power supply module

The booster power supply module (BPSM) is mounted within the booster itself. Itis an ac to ac switch mode supply with standard universal voltage inputcapability (88 V to 264 V, 45 to 66 Hz).

Two dc voltage outputs are provided (12 V and 28 V dc (GSM900) or 26 V dc(DCS1800)) to a maximum total output of 150 W (GSM900) or 175 W(DCS1800).

GSM-209-323Booster



68P02902W62-O

Alarms

The alarm board monitors the discrete outputs from both power amplifiers (PAs),PA1, PA2 and the ac to dc converter. When either or both PAs fail or the ac todc converter fails, a signal is reported to the Horizoncompact2 via a RS-232Cinterface. The line driver voltage levels are +/�12 V maximum.

An encoded RS232 status signal is sent to the Horizoncompact2 BTS everyminute. Within the signal are fault indicators. After receiving five interrupts, theHorizoncompact2 BTS interrogates this signal to determine whether the boosteris operational. No indicator is transmitted to the OMC-R if the Horizoncompact2booster is operating correctly. Only fault conditions are flagged.

If an error has occurred, then the type and nature of the error is reported to theOMC-R.

If the dc to dc converter fails within the booster, there is a loss of power to thealarm board and, in the absence of battery backup, no messages aretransmitted to the BTS.

The transmissions from the Horizoncompact2 booster contain uniqueidentification codes of the nature of failure, with expansion capability to detect afurther four sub-failure modes. Figure 5-15 shows a functional diagram of thealarm interface .

A description of the alarm codes sent to the BTS (should a functionality failureoccur at power up or during normal operation) is provided in Table 5-1.

Table 5-1 Alarm codes

Alarm Description

No Alarm All clear indication

PA1 Fail Power amplifier 1 transistor failed

PA2 Fail Power amplifier 2 transistor failed

PA1 and PA2 Fail Both power amplifiers transistors failed

GSM-209-323 Booster

20th Sep 02


68P02902W62-O Tech. 5�21

Alarm interface functional diagram

Figure 5-15 outlines the alarm board monitoring of the power amplifiers.

POWER UP RESET

SIGNAL

COND.

PA 1 PA 2

MICROCONTROLLER

87C51

POWER AMPLIFIERS

ALARM BOARD

PA = POWER AMPLIFIER

TXRS232 I/F

Figure 5-15 Alarm board monitoring

GSM-209-323Booster



68P02902W62-O

20th Sep 02


68P02902W62-O i

Chapter 6

Heat management

GSM-209-323

20th Sep 02ii


68P02902W62-O

GSM-209-323

20th Sep 02


68P02902W62-O iii

Chapter 6Heat management i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Heat management of the BTS Tech. 6�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of BTS heat management Tech. 6�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module heaters Tech. 6�2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .




GSM-209-323

20th Sep 02iv


68P02902W62-O

GSM-209-323 Heat management of the BTS

20th Sep 02


68P02902W62-O Tech. 6�1

Heat management of the BTS

Overview ofBTS heatmanagement

Heat management of the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 BTS is describedunder the topics Equipment heating and Equipment cooling.

Equipment heating

The RDIS and DTRX modules must be above a minimum temperature of 0 _Cbefore the output of the ac-dc PSM is enabled and the various voltages aredistributed through the BTS (see PSU description for details of voltagedistribution). If the equipment is below the minimum temperature when switchedon, heating is applied through heater mats until the minimum temperature isreached.

Enclosure cooling

Natural convection removes the generated heat. Cooling is by ambient airflowthrough the enclosure and across the finned heatsinks of the electronic andpower supply modules.

CAUTION Do not block the vents of the enclosure.Do not expose the BTS to prolonged sunlight without thesolar cover in place.Do not expose the BTS to high temperatures created byoutput vents from other equipment.

GSM-209-323Heat management of the BTS



68P02902W62-O

Module heaters

To ensure the correct operation of the RDIS and DTRX modules, two heatermats are attached to the heatsink of each module. These heater mats are usedin extreme cold operating environments to bring the modules quickly to thespecified working temperature.

Each heater mat has two elements configured for either 110 V ac or 230 V ac.The ac-dc PSM selects the appropriate element, depending on the ac input.

All heater mats are fused via a current fuse next to the ac input of the ac-dcPSM. These fuses cannot be replaced on site as this would invalidate thewarranty; the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 must be returned to Motorolafor repair.

Each mat also has a built-in overtemperature thermal fuse. If this fuse blows,the mat must be replaced by returning the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 to Motorola for repair.

Heater block diagram

Figure 6-1 shows the functional block diagram of the heater circuit.

HEATERMATS

EMC FILTERWITH FUSE

AC-DC PSMSELECTING EITHER 110 V OR 230 V

HEATERSAC INPUT

RDIS DTRX

HEATERMATS

Figure 6-1 Heater block diagram

GSM-209-323 Enclosure cooling

20th Sep 02


68P02902W62-O Tech. 6�3

Enclosure cooling

Overview ofenclosurecooling

The modules have finned heatsinks, which remove heat in the temperaturerange of up to 50 °C by natural convection.

Diagram offinnedheatsinks

Figure 6-2 shows the finned heatsinks.

Figure 6-2 BTS finned heatsinks

GSM-209-323Airflow within the enclosure



68P02902W62-O

Airflow within the enclosure

Enclosurecoolingoverview

Enclosure cooling is by natural convection only.

The ambient cooling airflow is channelled through the base of the enclosure,across the front of each of the electronic and power supply modules, and ventedthrough the top of the enclosure.

Airflow diagram

Figure 6-3 shows the ambient cooling airflow through the enclosure.

300 MM MINIMUMDISTANCE TO OBSTACLE

SOLAR COVER(ESSENTIAL FOR

PROTECTIONAGAINST SOLAR

HEATING)

DTRX MODULE

WALL BRACKET

BUILDINGWALL

RDIS MODULE

POWERSUPPLYMODULE

AIRFLOW

500 MM MINIMUMDISTANCE TO OBSTACLE

BOTTOM ENTRY FOR AIRFLOW

BATTERY

Figure 6-3 Enclosure airflow

GSM-209-323 Booster heat management

20th Sep 02


68P02902W62-O Tech. 6�5

Booster heat management

Overview ofboosterenclosurecooling

The heat management of the Horizoncompact2 booster relies on naturalconvection of the generated heat. Cooling is by ambient airflow across thefinned heatsink.

CAUTION Do not block the vents of the enclosure.Do not expose the booster to prolonged sunlight withoutthe solar cover in place.Do not expose the booster to excess temperature createdby output vents from other equipment.

Enclosure cooling

The rear of the booster enclosure has a finned heatsink. It is used to removeheat in the temperature range of up to 50 °C by natural convection.

Diagram of Horizoncompact2 booster heatsinks

Figure 6-4 illustrates the GSM900 and DCS1800 booster heatsinks.

GSM900 VERSION

DCS1800 VERSION

Figure 6-4 Horizoncompact2 booster heatsinks

GSM-209-323Booster heat management



68P02902W62-O

20th Sep 02


68P02902W62-O i

Chapter 7

Expansion feature

GSM-209-323

20th Sep 02ii


68P02902W62-O

GSM-209-323

20th Sep 02


68P02902W62-O iii

Chapter 7Expansion feature i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Expansion feature Tech. 7�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expansion feature overview Tech. 7�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dual band support Tech. 7�2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field replaceable units Tech. 7�2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration data Tech. 7�2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single band BTS configurations Tech. 7�3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dual band BTS configurations Tech. 7�3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Antenna options Tech. 7�4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software requirement Tech. 7�4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GSM-209-323

20th Sep 02iv


68P02902W62-O

GSM-209-323 Expansion feature

20th Sep 02


68P02902W62-O Tech. 7�1

Expansion feature

Expansionfeatureoverview

The Expansion feature allows two or three BTSs to be connected together toeffectively form a four or six carrier site.

When the expansion feature is used, the two or three Horizonmicro2 orHorizoncompact2 BTS units in the expanded system are interconnected by fibreoptic cables. One BTS in the configuration acts as a master and the attachedunits act as slaves.

In an expanded system only the master BTS is connected to the network, by anE1/HDSL interface; the slaves are not. Each slave unit requires one fibre opticcable to be connected to the master, serving for downlink and uplink data. Theslave BTS also receives synchronization signals on the downlink.

Figure 7-1 show a fully expanded Horizonmicro2 system.

SLAVE BTS

SLAVE BTS

MASTER BTS

FIBREOPTICLINKS

ig.055.rh

Figure 7-1 Horizonmicro2 BTS expansion feature

GSM-209-323Expansion feature



68P02902W62-O

Dual bandsupport

There are two variants of Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2, one foroperating at GSM900 frequencies and one for operating at DCS1800frequencies. The frequency is hardware specific and cannot be changed bysoftware.

However, although a single BTS operates only at the frequency it is designedfor, an expanded system using GSR5 (or later) software can have a mix of thetwo frequency variants. An expanded site can therefore support both GSM900and DCS1800 frequencies.

Fieldreplaceableunits

The Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 BTSs are single field replaceableunits (FRUs), and as such, no options exist to upgrade the units in the field. Theconfiguration options of the product are:

S E1/HDSL network connection. The number of HDSL modems is 0/1/2.

S Integrated antenna for Horizonmicro2.

Configurationdata

Hardware configuration information must be determined at the OMC-R in orderto facilitate the dispatching of field technicians with the proper sourceequipment. The additional configuration information required is:

S Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 BTS cabinet type.

The following Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 BTS site configuration isalso required to describe the hardware configuration. This data can be obtainedfrom the BSS/MIB database or is detectable from the hardware.

S GSM900 or DCS1800.

S HDSL to E1 NIU.

S CSFP (PCMCIA card for alternative load storage).

S Integrated antenna equipped.

GSM-209-323 Expansion feature

20th Sep 02


68P02902W62-O Tech. 7�3

Single bandBTSconfigurations

Carriers in a single BTS are always configured in the same cell and the samefrequency type. The Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 supports the followingsite configurations using single band cells:

NOTE The combination of Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2cannot be used at the same frequency.

Single BTS site

S Omni site - up to 2 carriers in a single cell.

Two BTS site


S Two sector site, 2 carriers per sector.

Three BTS site


S Two sector site, 2/4 carriers per sector.

S Three sector site, 2 carriers per sector.


Dual band BTSconfigurations

When dual band cells are configured, the following cell configurations aresupported:

Two BTS site

S One BTS with up to two GSM900 carriers and one BTS with up to twoDCS1800 carriers.

Three BTS site

S One BTS with up to two GSM 900 carriers and two BTSs with up to a totalof four DCS1800 carriers.

S Two BTSs with up to a total of four GSM900 carriers and one BTS with upto two DCS1800 carriers.

GSM-209-323Expansion feature



68P02902W62-O

Antennaoptions

The Horizonmicro2 has an optional internal antenna and can also use anexternal antenna.

The Horizoncompact2 is connected to a booster which in turn is connected totwo external antennas.

Softwarerequirement

Software release GSR5 or later is required for the Horizonmicro2 orHorizoncompact2 expansion feature to be available. GSR5 software is neededin both master and slave BTSs of an expanded system to enable themaster/slave relationships to be established.

Software release GSR4 allows the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 tofunction only as single BTS systems without expansion capabilities. If GSR4software is used on an expanded system, only the BTS with the E1/HDSLconnection will function.

CHAPTER 2INSTALLATIONPROCEDURES

CHAPTER 3BTS EXPANSION

CHAPTER 4COMMISSIONING

CHAPTER 5DECOMMISSIONING

CHAPTER 1 SITE PREPARATION

20th Sep 02

Installation & Configuration: Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2

68P02902W63-O i

Category 423

Installation & Configuration (Inst.)

GSM-209-423

20th Sep 02ii


68P02902W63-O

GSM-209-423

20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O iii

Category 423Installation & Configuration (Inst.) i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 1Site preparation i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation procedure overview Inst. 1�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installation procedure list Inst. 1�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Weight of delivered package Inst. 1�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .











GSM-209-423

20th Sep 02iv


68P02902W63-O









GSM-209-423

20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O v


Chapter 2Installation procedures i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview of installation procedures Inst. 2�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to the procedures Inst. 2�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation procedures Inst. 2�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E1 link testing Inst. 2�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torque values Inst. 2�2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessing the equipment Inst. 2�3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .








GSM-209-423

20th Sep 02vi


68P02902W63-O





Chapter 3BTS expansion i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to the BTS expansion procedure Inst. 3�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

About the procedure Inst. 3�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software requirements Inst. 3�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Master/slave establishment Inst. 3�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration of a BTS site Inst. 3�2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the BTSs Inst. 3�2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



Chapter 4Commissioning i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Commissioning Inst. 4�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Commissioning overview Inst. 4�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


GSM-209-423

20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O vii







GSM-209-423

20th Sep 02viii


68P02902W63-O

20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O i

Chapter 1

Site preparation

GSM-209-423

20th Sep 02ii


68P02902W63-O

GSM-209-423

20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O iii

Chapter 1Site preparation i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installation procedure overview Inst. 1�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation procedure list Inst. 1�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Weight of delivered package Inst. 1�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .











GSM-209-423

20th Sep 02iv


68P02902W63-O









GSM-209-423

20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O v


GSM-209-423

20th Sep 02vi


68P02902W63-O

GSM-209-423

20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O vii

GSM-209-423 Installation procedure overview

20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O Inst. 1�1

Installation procedure overview

Installationprocedure list

This chapter contains information that should be read before beginning theactual installation.

Prior to the physical installation of a Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2enclosure, there is a requirement to perform the procedures listed in Table 1-1.

Table 1-1 Horizonmicro2 / Horizoncompact2 pre-installation procedures

Procedure Description

Site visit Describes the sequence of events andprocedures to be performed at the site beforeactual installation.

Preparing the site Contains details of physical siterequirements.

Earthing the site Describes site earth requirements.

Unpacking the installation kit Describes how to unpack the installation kit.

Mounting the wall bracket Describes the procedure to be used formounting the Horizonmicro2 orHorizoncompact2 BTS and Horizoncompactbooster wall mounting bracket.

Installing the power and earthcabling

Describes the procedures to be used forpower and earth cabling installation.

Installing the Rx, Tx, antennacabling

Details the procedures to be used for Rx, Txand antenna cable installation.

Installing the E1 link cabling Describes the procedures to be used for E1link cable installation.

NOTE Those parts of the installation kit that are required afterfitment of the BTS and booster wall brackets will need tobe stored safely and securely.

Weight ofdeliveredpackage

WARNING The equipment and packaging weighs approximately40 kg in total. Care must be taken in handling and lifting,and requires two persons.

GSM-209-423Tools and materials

20th Sep 02Inst. 1�2


68P02902W63-O

Tools and materials

Introduction totools andmaterials

The following tables list the recommended tools and materials for carrying outthe procedures in this manual.

A recommended Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 tool kit is listed inTable 1-2.

Table 1-2 Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 tool kit

Quantity Description

1 13 mm combination spanner.

1 Screwdriver set: flats and posidrive.

1 1/4 inch square drive.

1 1/4 inch extension.

1 1/4 inch to hex adapter.

1 T10 bit.

1 T25 tamperproof bit (supplied).

1 T30 tamperproof bit (supplied).

1 6 mm hex bit.

1 Hammer drill plus masonry bits.

1 Roll insulation tape.

1 Spirit level.

1 Ratchet & sockets.

1 Torque wrench.

1 Ruler.

1 Hammer.

1 Pole mount banding tool (order number SWLN4847).

1 Wire stripping tool.

1 Crimping tool.

1 Small hacksaw.

GSM-209-423 Tools and materials

20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O Inst. 1�3

Torque values

The torque values that are to be used when installing Horizonmicro2 orHorizoncompact2 equipment are listed in Table 1-3.

Table 1-3 Wall bracket torque values (BTS and booster)

Part Size/Type Torque Where

Chassis/wall bracket earthstud (BTS)

M8 nut 10 Nm Factory & field

Chassis/wall bracket earthstud (booster)(Horizoncompact2 only)


Wall bracket/wall fixings Customer selection Field only

BTS conduit bracket M6 skt hd 3.4 Nm Factory & field

Booster conduit bracket

(Horizoncompact2 only)

M8 skt hd 10 Nm Factory & field

GSM-209-423Site requirements and considerations



68P02902W63-O

Site requirements and considerations

Introduction

The base site area where the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 is to beinstalled must meet the structural and environmental criteria provided in thissection.

Other relevant installation and operational requirements for the equipment, suchas weights, dimensions and power requirements are also provided here.

NOTE The Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 is mounted on awall, or similar flat surface, using a wall bracket. It mayalso be pole mounted using the same wall bracket and thepole securing brackets and straps.

Environmentalrequirements

The environmental limits for equipment operation are defined in Table 1-4.

Table 1-4 Environmental limits

Environment Temperature Relative humidity

Operating �33 _C to +50 _C 5% to 100%

Storage (packaged) �33 _C to +70 _C 8% to 100%

Dimensions

Table 1-5 lists the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 equipment dimensions.

Table 1-5 Equipment dimensions (mm)

Equipment Height Width Depth, includingwall bracket

BTS 532 542 201

Booster 347 541 226

Weights

Table 1-6 lists the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 equipment weights.

Table 1-6 Equipment weights (kg)

EquipmentWeight, excluding wallbracket, solar cover or

battery

Weight, including wallbracket, solar cover and

battery

BTS 21 28

Booster GSM900 15 20

Booster DCS1800 19 24

GSM-209-423 Site requirements and considerations

20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O Inst. 1�5

Powerspecifications

Power supply requirements

Table 1-7 lists the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 equipment powerrequirements.

Table 1-7 BTS power requirements

Equipment Supply voltage range Maximum supply currentrange

BTS88 V to 264 V ac (45�66 Hz)

7.8 A to 2.6 A(depending on supply voltage)

Booster88 V to 264 V ac (45 66 Hz)

2.3 A

Battery backup

Table 1-8 shows the specifications for the battery used in the Horizonmicro2 andHorizoncompact2 BTSs.

Table 1-8 Battery specifications

Voltage Capacity Backup duration

22 V dc 2.5 Ah > 5 minutes

Power consumption

Table 1-9 displays the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 equipment powerconsumption figures.

Table 1-9 BTS power consumption (W)

Equipment Ambienttemperature

Maximumpower

consumption

Typical powerconsumption

BTS (heater on) �40 °C to 10 °C 688 658

BTS (heater off) 10 °C to 50 °C 188 138

Booster GSM900 � 169 144

Booster DCS1800 � 199 170

NOTE The maximum power consumption figures apply toextreme operating conditions (such as minimum operatingambient temperature, heaters on, maximum RF outputpower, charging batteries and lowest module efficiencies).Typical power consumption is for the equipment running atfull RF output power, trickle battery charge and nominalmodule efficiencies.

GSM-209-423Site requirements and considerations



68P02902W63-O


Software release GSR4 limits the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 tofunction only as single BTS systems without expansion capabilities.

Software release GSR5 or later is required to support the expansion feature forthe Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2. The GSR5 software is needed in bothmaster and slave BTSs to enable the master/slave relationship. If GSR4software is used on an expanded system, only the BTS with the E1/HDSLconnection will be functional.

HDSL modems

Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 BTSs shipped after 31st December 2001are not fitted with an internal HDSL modem. A suitable external HDSL modemmust be used if a HDSL link to the BSC is required for these BTSs.

Contact the local Motorola office for assistance prior to purchasing a HDSLmodem for this purpose.

Structuralrequirements

To adequately support the weight of the fully equipped Horizoncompact2including wall bracket, the designated mounting surface must be capable ofbearing a maximum load of:

S 28 kg for the GSM900 or DCS1800 Horizonmicro2, or

S 48 kg for the GSM900 Horizoncompact2 (28 kg) with booster (20 kg), or

S 52 kg for the DCS1800 Horizoncompact2 (28 kg) with booster (24 kg).

See the section entitled Mounting guidelines for details of the variouscategories of mounting surface materials.

WARNING In order to preserve safety, local specialist assistanceshould be sought for more specific mountingrecommendations, since detailed information on thesubject is beyond the scope of this manual.

Spacerequirements

Use the wall brackets as templates. Clearance of 300 mm above, 500 mmbelow, 10 mm each side and 1000 mm in front of the Horizonmicro2 orHorizoncompact2 BTS and booster (only used with the Horizoncompact2) isrequired to allow for installation and maintenance.

100 mm of space to the right side is required if the carrying/lifting handles arefitted and used. 500 mm of space to the left side is needed for clearance for theexpansion feature.

GSM-209-423 Site requirements and considerations

20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O Inst. 1�7

Spacerequirementsdiagram

Figure 1-1 shows the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 clearances.

Horizoncompact2booster

300 mm CLEARANCE

300 mm CLEARANCE

*

* 100 mm CLEARANCE100 mm CLEARANCE

100 mm CLEARANCE*

*100 mm CLEARANCE

500 mm CLEARANCE

Horizonmicro2OR

Horizoncompact2BTS

* CLEARANCE FOR USE OF HANDLES

Figure 1-1 Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 clearances

GSM-209-423Site visit safety and weather protection



68P02902W63-O

Site visit safety and weather protection

Introduction tosite safety

When preparing to do work at a site and upon arrival, follow the instructionsprovided in this section.

Rubbish on site

Clear rubbish from the site on completion of the job, unless otherwise indicatedby the customer.

WARNING Do not burn rubbish as packaging might give off toxicgases.

On site safety

Responsibilities of senior team member

The senior member of the team must:

S Advise all new staff on site of safety requirements before any work takesplace.

Responsibilities of all personnel

All personnel must:

S Wear supplied safety helmets when antenna or overhead work is inprogress, and when local regulations require them.

S Wear supplied safety goggles and dust masks when drilling, this isparticularly important when drilling overhead ironwork.

S Wear supplied ear protectors while drilling is in progress.

S Wear approved safety footwear when moving heavy equipment.

S Observe safety recommendations when lifting equipment.

S Wear a safety harness and line with a shock absorber anchored to asuitable point, and observe all safety regulations when working at height.

Stop any work that is being supervised if any person in the team is not properlyprotected.

When installing cable ties, even temporarily, cut the excess or tail properly. Thisis to prevent sharp edges inflicting injury when not cut flush with the lockingedge.

GSM-209-423 Site visit safety and weather protection

20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O Inst. 1�9

Weatherconditions andmaintenancecover

WARNING Due consideration should be given to the hazards of windand other inclement weather conditions when installing theHorizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2. This is especiallyimportant when using a ladder to gain access.Use discretion at all times. Do not climb a ladder,scaffolding or other method of access if you feel unsafe todo so under these weather conditions.

Motorola recommends that a Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 is not installedduring inclement weather conditions. If this cannot be avoided, some form ofmaintenance cover should be used.

NOTE A maintenance cover is not supplied with theHorizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 BTS orHorizoncompact2 booster equipment and should beprovided by the customer if required.

Installation and configuration of a Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 enclosureand booster unit is dependent on the weather conditions. There are threesituations where the recommended guidelines should be considered beforecommencing work:

S No access.

S Access with maintenance cover.

S Access without maintenance cover.

No accessAccess should not be attempted to an enclosure during the following actual orimminent inclement weather conditions, with or without the maintenance cover:

S Strong winds.

S Heavy persistent rain, snow, hail or sleet.

S During an electrical storm.

Access with maintenance coverAccess may be made to an enclosure under the following conditions with theuse of the maintenance cover:

S Persistent rain, snow, hail or sleet.

S Where airborne substances (such as leaves or dust) may cause aproblem.

Access without maintenance coverAccess may be made under the following conditions without the use of themaintenance cover:

S No precipitation occurring or likely to occur during the maintenance period.

S When the temperature is between �40 _C to +50 _C.

GSM-209-423Earthing and transient protection



68P02902W63-O

Earthing and transient protection

Site earthing

This section summarises general procedures for earthing the site. Refer to theGrounding guidelines for cellular radio installations (68P81150E62) . Usenational regulations or refer to Requirements for Electrical Installations (16thEdition) BS 7671 (IEC364).

S The cell site equipment must be earthed (in the same common earth pointas its power source).

S A supplementary earth protection terminal (stud) is located on theHorizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 BTS wall bracket. It is provided foradditional protection in exposed environments. This wall bracket earth isconnected to the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 earth protection studon the chassis by a short attached cable (see Figure 1-2) once theHorizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 BTS chassis is installed.

S A supplementary earth protection terminal (stud) is located on theHorizoncompact2 booster wall bracket. It is provided for additionalprotection in exposed environments. This wall bracket earth is connectedto the Horizoncompact2 booster earth protection stud on the chassis by ashort attached cable (see Figure 1-3) once the Horizoncompact2 boosterchassis is installed.

S Provision should be made for routeing earthing lines into the site andmaking a connection to the wall bracket earthing stud before beginningthe installation of the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 chassis.

S Refer to the site-specific building documentation for detailed site earthinginformation.

E1 linktransient andlightningprotection

E1 links connected to Motorola equipment have secondary transient protectionas part of the 75 ohm E1 line termination (RHINO) or 120 ohm E1 linetermination (DINO). Surge arresters should be utilized to provide additionalprotection when exposure to high voltages is likely (for example whenequipment is installed in open environments).

For in-building sites, ensure any external connection to the site is fed throughstandard coaxial electromagnetic protection (EMP) devices. EMP devices arecustomer/country dependent and Motorola cannot recommend a specific type.

GSM-209-423 Earthing the site

20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O Inst. 1�11

Earthing the site

Introduction toearthing the site

The following covers the earthing procedure for a Horizonmicro2 orHorizoncompact2 site.

NOTE The term earth in this manual equates to the term groundused in some associated documentation.

Requirements

Figure 1-2 shows the earthing requirements for a Horizonmicro2 orHorizoncompact2 site.

Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 BTS

Each site external earth must be assessed on an individual site basis and incompliance to regional electric company (REC) requirements or nationalrequirements (conditions will vary considerably depending on local soilconditions and site topography). This may involve a site survey, soil resistancetest, and earth fault loop impedance measurement before installation. Usenational regulations or refer to Requirements for Electrical Installations (16thEdition) BS 7671 (IEC364).

WALL MOUNTINGBRACKET

AC/DCPSU

BTS CHASSIS

MAIN BUILDING EARTH

SUPPLEMENTARYEARTH CABLE

SAFETY EARTH

EARTH CABLE(AT BOTTOM OF

BRACKET)

WALL BRACKET EARTH CABLEAWAITING CONNECTION TO

CHASSIS

EARTHED THROUGHAC SOURCE SUPPLY

Figure 1-2 Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 earthing requirements

GSM-209-423Earthing the site



68P02902W63-O


Figure 1-3 shows the earth connection points for the booster wall bracket andchassis. This installation may involve a site survey, soil resistance test and earthfault loop impedance measurement before installation. Use national regulationsor refer to Requirements for Electrical Installations (16th Edition) BS 7671(IEC364).

WALL MOUNTINGBRACKET

AC/DCPSU

MAIN BUILDING EARTH

EARTH CABLE(AT BOTTOM OF

BRACKET)


CHASSIS

BOOSTERCHASSIS

SUPPLEMENTARYEARTH CABLE

SAFETY EARTHEARTHED THROUGHAC SOURCE SUPPLY

Figure 1-3 Horizoncompact2 booster earthing requirements (GSM900 wallbracket shown)

GSM-209-423 Installation kit delivery and packaging

20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O Inst. 1�13

Installation kit delivery and packaging

Equipmentdelivery

The equipment should be carefully delivered to the site by the freight company,along with the necessary moving pallets and padding. Use the pallets andpadding to move the equipment from the unloading area to the installation point.

Installation kitequipment

The installation kit comprises all the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2equipment and is shipped in a recycleable cardboard container. The contentsare listed below and the packaging is shown in Figure 1-4.

The installation kit comprises:

S Carton A, which contains the following:

Wall mounting bracket.

Pole/Wall mounting kit comprising:

� 1 medium channel, long.

� 1 medium channel, short.

� 2 universal channel clamps.

� 3 bucklestraps, 1120 mm long (1 spare).

� 8 screws, 8 washers (two spare).

� 1 cable tie.

� 1 mounting bracket.

� 1 conduit bracket.

Earth strap (wall mounting bracket to chassis) (attached to mountingbracket).

Conduit termination bracket and fittings.

S Carton B, which contains the following:

Solar cover (front).

Battery and battery cover.

Customer interface kit including:

� T25 tamperproof Torx bit (for solar cover).

� T30 tamperproof Torx bit (for pole mount).

S Carton C, which contains the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 BTSchassis.

GSM-209-423Installation kit delivery and packaging



68P02902W63-O

CARTON C

CARTON ACARTON B

CARTON C:Horizonmicro2 UNITORHorizoncompact2 UNIT(see CAUTION below)

CARTON A contents:WALL MOUNTING KITPOLE MOUNT FITTINGSCONDUIT TERMINATION BRACKET ANDFITTINGS

CARTON B contents:SOLAR COVERCUSTOMER INTERFACE KITBATTERY AND BATTERY COVERINTERNAL ANTENNA (OPTIONAL)

Tools required:see Table 1-2

Inspect box contents for transit damage.Ensure items are handled carefully to avoid damage.

WARNING This equipment and packaging weighs approximately40 kg in total. Care must be taken in handling and lifting,and will require two persons.

CAUTION To prevent the possibility of condensation build up, do notopen carton C until the equipment is to be commissioned.

Figure 1-4 Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 installation kit

GSM-209-423 Unpacking the BTS installation kit

20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O Inst. 1�15

Unpacking the BTS installation kit

Introduction

WARNING The assembled Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2installation kit weighs approximately 28 kg (Horizonmicro2or Horizoncompact2, wall bracket and conduit).Observe normal handling precautions when lifting andcarrying.

CAUTION Take care to ensure the equipment is not scratched ordamaged in any way during this procedure.

Remove cartons A, B and C from the container, as shown in Figure 1-4. Inspectthe equipment immediately for damage. Report the extent of any damage to thetransport company.

Disposing ofthe packingmaterial

To dispose of the packing material:

1. Put the three cartons back in the shipping container.

2. Dispose of the shipping container as advised by the in-country projectmanager.

NOTE The packaging is recycleable cardboard. It is NOT to bereturned to the factory.

WARNING Should the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 need to bereturned to the factory at any time in the future, contactthe Motorola local office who will advise on correctpackaging.Do not return the battery pack with the BTS. Under nocircumstances should BTSs be packaged with the batterypack attached because if the battery pack is damaged, theloose battery cells will present a potential safety hazard.

GSM-209-423Booster installation kit delivery and packaging



68P02902W63-O

Booster installation kit delivery and packaging

Equipmentdelivery

The equipment should be carefully delivered to the site by the freight company,along with the necessary moving pallets and padding. Use the pallets andpadding to move the equipment from the unloading area to the installation point.

Installation kitequipment

The installation kit comprises all the Horizoncompact2 booster equipment and isshipped in a recycleable cardboard container. The contents are listed below andthe packaging is shown in Figure 1-5.

The installation kit comprises:

S Carton A, which contains the following;

Wall mounting bracket.

� Earth strap (wall mounting bracket to chassis � attached to mountingbracket).

Pole mounting kit, comprising:

� Medium channel extension (x 2).

� Universal clamp (x 2).

� Buckle strap (x 3) 1120 mm long (1 spare).

� Pan head screw (x 8), tamperproof torque M6 x 16 (2 spare).

� Plain washer (x 8), (2 spare).

� Conduit bracket.

� M8 x 20 socket head screws (x 2), fitted to conduit bracket.

� Cable tie.

GSM-209-423 Booster installation kit delivery and packaging

20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O Inst. 1�17

S Carton B, which contains the following:

Solar cover.

� M5 x 20 tamperproof screws (x 2) attached to the lower coverbrackets.

� Blank badge (fitted to cover).

Cable kit comprising:

� RF cable (2 m), Horizoncompact2 BTS Tx1 to booster.

� RF cable (2 m), Horizoncompact2 BTS Tx2 to booster.

� RF cable (2 m), Horizoncompact2 BTS Rx to booster.

� Antenna cables (x 2), 400 mm.

� Alarm cable, 2.5 m.

Security bracket.

� M8 x 20 socket head screws (x 4), (2 for security plate, 2 spare).

� M8 plain washers (x 2), (1 spare).

S Carton C, which contains the following:

� Horizoncompact2 booster.

� Horizoncompact2 booster handles.

� M8 x 20 socket head screws (x 4) fitted to handles*.

� M8 plain washers (x 4) fitted to handles*.

� Cable strain relief clamp (attached to lower chassis flange).

� M8 x 20 socket head screws (x 2) fitted to back plate of chassis (forsecuring security plate).

NOTE * These screws and washers are to be used to secure the Horizoncompact2 booster unit to the wall bracket once the handles have been removed.

GSM-209-423Booster installation kit delivery and packaging



68P02902W63-O

CARTON A contents:WALL MOUNTING KITPOLE MOUNT KITCONDUIT TERMINATION BRACKET ANDFITTINGS

CARTON B contents:SOLAR COVER

Tools required:see Table 1-2

Inspect box contents for transit damage.Ensure items are handled carefully to avoid damage.

Horizoncompact2 BOOSTERHorizoncompact2 HANDLES(see CAUTION below)

CABLE KITSECURITY BRACKET

CARTON C:

WARNING This equipment and packaging weighs approximately40 kg. Care must be taken in handling and lifting, and willrequire two persons.

CAUTION To prevent the possibility of condensation build up, do notopen carton C until the equipment is to be commissioned.

Figure 1-5 Horizoncompact2 booster installation kit

GSM-209-423 Unpacking the installation kit

20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O Inst. 1�19

Unpacking the installation kit

Introduction

WARNING The assembled Horizoncompact2 booster installation kitweighs approximately 20 kg GSM900 and 24 kgDCS1800.Observe normal handling precautions when lifting andcarrying.

CAUTION Take care to ensure the equipment is not scratched ordamaged in any way during this procedure.

Remove cartons A, B and C from the container, as shown in Figure 1-4. Inspectthe equipment immediately for damage. Report the extent of any damage to thetransport company.

Disposing ofthe packingmaterial

To dispose of the packing material:

1. Put the three cartons back in the shipping container.

2. Dispose of the shipping container as advised by the in-country projectmanager.

NOTE The packaging is recycleable cardboard. It is NOT to bereturned to the factory.Should the Horizoncompact2 booster need to be returnedto the factory at any time in the future, contact theMotorola local office who will advise on correctpackaging.

GSM-209-423Mounting guidelines



68P02902W63-O

Mounting guidelines

Introduction tomountingguidelines

This section provides general guidelines on mounting the Horizonmicro2 orHorizoncompact2 (comprising BTS enclosure and booster).

Local specialist assistance should be sought for more specific mountingrecommendations, since detailed information on the subject is beyond the scopeof this manual.

Mountingguidelines

Flatness of walls

The walls onto which the BTS enclosure is intended to be installed should haveno variations in depth greater than 5 mm. This criteria applies over a width of640 mm (120 mm either side of the fixing points) and a height of 340 mm(45 mm above and below the fixing points). The same measurements apply tothe Horizoncompact2 booster, with the exception that the walls onto which theenclosure is intended to be installed should have no variations in depth greaterthan 2 mm.

If the wall required does not meet this criteria, measures should be taken toreduce these variations, either by modifying the wall itself to produce a flat areaor by some addition which creates a flat surface or set of points on the wall.

Any changes can alter the wall characteristics and additions can add extrastresses. Advice should be sought on the best method of producing the flatsurface required. The wall, plus additions, must be considered strong enough bysurvey to support the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 enclosure weight.

GSM-209-423 Mounting guidelines

20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O Inst. 1�21

Mounting surfaces

Table 1-10 shows fixing design and specifications for different types of mountingsurface. Ideally, the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 should be fixed to aGroup A (i) material.

Table 1-10 Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 fixing material specifications

Groupor

category

Description of material Mounting guidelines

Group A(i)

Concrete, brickwork, stonework,dense aggregate blockworkand reconstituted stone.

The uppermost fixings should havethe weight of at least 600 mm ofsolid construction above them.

Group A(ii)

Lightweight, blockwork (solid),lightweight precast concreteunits (solid).

The uppermost fixings shouldhave the weight of at least900 mm of solid construction

b thGroup A(iii)

Hollow brickwork, hollow claypots and tiles, hollow concreteunits.

above them.

Group Ageneral

The fixings should not penetrate more than 70 mm, or less than50 mm. Construction should be of at least 100 mm thickness.11 mm diameter clearance holes are provided in the wall brackets.

Group B(i)

Renders and mortars applieddirectly to backgrounds inGroup A, with or withoutsurface tiles and mosaics.

Where the surface materials are upto 50 mm thick, add 300 mm to theheight of construction above thehighest fixing specified for Group A.

Group B(ii)

Renders and mortars applieddirectly to backgrounds inGroup A, with or withoutintermediate insulation.

Where the standoff from the face ofthe background to the face of thecladding is between 50 mm and100 mm, check first that vapourbarriers or sealed cavities will notbe damaged. Add 600 mm to theheights of construction above thehighest fixing specified for Group A.

Group C Composite lightweightcladding panels, metalcladding and sheeting oversteel or timber framing.

In general, it is not recommendedthat the BTS is fixed to thesecladdings. Apart from the inherentweakness of these materials,

t ti f h l ddi Group D Curtain walling and windowswith glass, metal, plastic orother lightweight sheetmaterials, with or withoutinsulation.

penetration of such claddings cancause cold bridging, moistureingress and loss of insulatingproperties. Where these claddingshave an external support framecapable of supporting the BTS, it

Group E Cavity construction of twosubstantially independentleaves of construction,consisting of an inner leaf ofGroup A materials and an outerleaf of Group C or D materials.

capable of supporting the BTS, itmay be possible to fix to it. Thespecialist advice of the claddingsystem manufacturer must besought if such a fixing iscontemplated.

GSM-209-423Example layouts



68P02902W63-O

Example layoutsRefer to the following installation layout examples before proceeding with wallbracket or pole mounting procedures.

Horizonmicro2 � power and RF cabling using a wall duct

Figure 1-6 shows Horizonmicro2 power and RF cabling using a wall duct.

WARNING This information must be read in conjunction with thesafety issues described elsewhere in this manual.

DUCT (NOTPROVIDED)

OPTIONALINTERNALANTENNA

RX/TX CABLECONNECTOR

RX/TX CABLEEXTERNALANTENNA

NETWORKLINES

AC SUPPLYCONNECTOR

Figure 1-6 Horizonmicro2 power and RF cabling using a wall duct

GSM-209-423 Example layouts

20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O Inst. 1�23

Horizonmicro2 � power and RF cabling using upper and lower wallducts

Figure 1-7 shows a Horizonmicro2 power and RF cabling using upper and lowerwall ducts.


NETWORKLINES

AC SUPPLYCONNECTOR

RX/TXCABLE

(EXTERNALANTENNA)

RX/TX CABLECONNECTOR

OPTIONALINTERNALANTENNA

DUCT (NOTPROVIDED)

DUCT (NOTPROVIDED)

Figure 1-7 Horizonmicro2 power and RF cabling using upper and lower wallducts




68P02902W63-O

Horizonmicro2 � pole mounting (back to back)

Figure 1-8 shows a Horizonmicro2 pole mount back to back installation.


Horizonmicro2

Horizonmicro2

NETWORKLINES

NETWORKLINES

AC SUPPLYCABLE

AC SUPPLYCABLE

INTERNALANTENNA

INTERNALANTENNA

Figure 1-8 Horizonmicro2 example layout, pole mount back to back


20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O Inst. 1�25

GSM900 Horizoncompact2 and booster � mounting using a wall duct

Figure 1-9 shows a GSM900 Horizoncompact2 and booster unit installationusing a wall duct.


BOOSTER

ALARMS CABLE

AC POWER CABLE

ALARMS CONNECTOR

DUCT(NOT PROVIDED)

NETWORK LINES

ALARMS CABLE

Horizoncompact2

BTS

Horizoncompact2

AC SUPPLYCONNECTOR

AC SUPPLY CONNECTOR

Figure 1-9 GSM900 Horizoncompact2 and booster layout, using wall duct




68P02902W63-O

GSM900 Horizoncompact2 and booster � RF cabling using a wallductFigure 1-10 shows RF cabling for a GSM900 Horizoncompact2 and booster unitusing a wall duct.


TX2 CONNECTORSLAVE (N-type)

RX CONNECTOR (N-type)

ANT2 CONNECTOR (N-type)

TX1 CONNECTORMASTER (N-type)

BOOSTER


ANT1 CABLE

REDWHITE BLUE

ANT2 CABLE

BTS

Horizoncompact2

Horizoncompact2

RX CABLECONNECTOR

(N-type)

TX2 CABLECONNECTOR

SLAVE (N-type)

TX1 CABLECONNECTOR

MASTER (N-type)

DUCT (NOTPROVIDED)

Figure 1-10 GSM900 Horizoncompact2 and booster unit RF cabling using wallduct


20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O Inst. 1�27

GSM900 Horizoncompact2 and booster � RF cabling using part of awall duct

Figure 1-11 shows RF cabling for a GSM900 Horizoncompact2 using part of awall duct.


TX2 CABLECONNECTOR SLAVE

(N-type)

RX CONNECTOR(N-type)

ANT2 CONNECTOR(N-type)

TX1 CABLECONNECTOR

MASTER (N-type)

BOOSTER

ANT1 CONNECTOR(N-type)

ANT1 CABLE

REDWHITE BLUE

ANT2 CABLE

2 m CABLE

BTS

Horizoncompact2

Horizoncompact2

RX CABLECONNECTOR

(N-type)

TX2 CABLECONNECTOR

SLAVE (N-type)

TX1 CABLECONNECTOR

MASTER (N-type)

DUCT (NOTPROVIDED)

Figure 1-11 GSM900 Horizoncompact2 RF cabling using part of wall duct




68P02902W63-O

GSM900 Horizoncompact2 and booster � power and alarm cablingusing a wall duct

Figure 1-12 shows a GSM900 Horizoncompact2 and booster unit power andalarm cabling using a wall duct.


ALARMSCABLE

AC POWERCABLE

ALARMSCONNECTOR

AC SUPPLYCONNECTOR

AC SUPPLYCONNECTOR

NETWORK LINES

ALARMS CABLE

DUCT (NOTPROVIDED)


Horizoncompact2BTS

AC SUPPLYCABLES

Figure 1-12 GSM900 Horizoncompact2 and booster unit power and alarmcabling using wall duct


20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O Inst. 1�29

GSM900 Horizoncompact2 and booster � RF cabling using a wallduct

Figure 1-13 shows RF cabling for a GSM900 Horizoncompact2 and booster unitusing a wall duct.


TX2 CABLECONNECTOR

SLAVE (N-type)

ANT2 CABLECONNECTOR

(N-type)

RX CABLECONNECTOR

(N-type)

ANT1 CABLECONNECTOR

(N-type)

ANT1 CABLE

TX2 CABLECONNECTOR

SLAVE (N-type)

MASTER (N-type)

TX1 CABLECONNECTOR

RX CABLECONNECTOR

(N-type)

WHITE BLUE RED

ANT2 CABLE


Horizoncompact2BTS

TX1 CABLECONNECTOR

(N-type)

DUCT (NOTPROVIDED)

RX CABLE

TX2 CABLETX1 CABLE

Figure 1-13 GSM900 Horizoncompact2 and booster unit RF cabling using wallduct




68P02902W63-O

DCS1800 Horizoncompact2 and booster � power and alarm cablingusing a wall duct

Figure 1-14 shows DCS1800 Horizoncompact2 power and alarm cabling using awall duct.


ALARMS CABLE

ALARMS CONNECTOR

AC SUPPLY CONNECTOR

NETWORK LINES

ALARMS CABLE

UNDERSIDE VIEW


Horizoncompact2BTS

AC SUPPLY CABLE

AC SUPPLY CONNECTOR

DUCT (NOT PROVIDED)

Figure 1-14 DCS1800 Horizoncompact2 power and alarm cabling using wallduct


20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O Inst. 1�31

DCS1800 Horizoncompact2 and booster � RF cabling using a wallduct

Figure 1-15 shows DCS1800 Horizoncompact2 RF cabling using a wall duct.


TX2 CABLECONNECTOR

SLAVE (N-type)

RX CABLECONNECTOR

(N-type)

RX CABLECONNECTOR (N-type) ANT2 CONNECTOR (N-type)


DUCT (NOTPROVIDED)

ANT1 CABLE

REDWHITE BLUE

ANT2 CABLE

Horizoncompact2 BOOSTER

Horizoncompact2BTS

TX1 CABLECONNECTOR

MASTER (N-type)

TX2 CABLE CONNECTOR SLAVE(N-type)

TX1 CABLE CONNECTORMASTER (N-type)

Figure 1-15 DCS1800 Horizoncompact2 RF cabling using wall duct




68P02902W63-O

DCS1800 Horizoncompact2 and booster � RF cabling using part of awall duct

Figure 1-16 shows DCS1800 Horizoncompact2 RF cabling using part of a wallduct.


Horizoncompact2BTS

RX CABLECONNECTOR

(N-type)


(N-type)

TX1 CABLECONNECTOR MASTER

(N-type)RX CABLECONNECTOR (N-type) ANT2 CONNECTOR (N-type)


DUCT (NOTPROVIDED)

ANT1 CABLE

RED

WHITEBLUE

ANT2 CABLE

2 m CABLE


TX2 CABLE CONNECTORSLAVE (N-type)

TX1 CABLECONNECTOR

MASTER (N-type)

Figure 1-16 DCS1800 Horizoncompact2 RF cabling using part of wall duct


20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O Inst. 1�33

DCS1800 Horizoncompact2 and booster � power and alarm cablingusing pole duct

Figure 1-17 shows DCS1800 Horizoncompact2 power and alarm cabling usingpole duct.


ALARMSCABLE

AC SUPPLYCABLE

ALARMSCONNECTOR

AC SUPPLYCONNECTOR

NETWORK LINES

ALARMS CABLE

DUCT (NOTPROVIDED)

Horizoncompact2BTS


AC SUPPLY CABLES

AC SUPPLYCONNECTOR

Figure 1-17 DCS1800 Horizoncompact2 power and alarm cabling using poleduct




68P02902W63-O

DCS1800 Horizoncompact2 and booster � RF cabling using poleduct

Figure 1-18 shows DCS1800 Horizoncompact2 RF cabling using pole duct.



(N-type)

RX CABLECONNECTOR (N-type)


(N-type)


N-type)

Horizoncompact2BTS


RX CONNECTOR(N-type)


TX2 CABLE

RX CABLE

TX1 CABLE

ANT1 CABLE


(N-type)

WHITE BLUE RED

DUCT (NOTPROVIDED)

ANT2 CABLE


Figure 1-18 DCS1800 Horizoncompact2 RF cabling using pole duct


20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O Inst. 1�35

DCS1800 Horizoncompact2 and booster � RF cabling without poleduct

Figure 1-19 shows DCS1800 Horizoncompact2 RF cabling without pole duct.


TX2 CABLE CONNECTORSLAVE (N-type)

RED

TX2 CABLECONNECTOR

SLAVE (N-type)

RX CABLE CONNECTOR(N-type) ANT2 CONNECTOR (N-type)


ANT1 CABLE

TX1 CABLE CONNECTORMASTER (N-type)

RX CABLE CONNECTOR(N-type)

WHITEBLUE

ANT2 CABLE

DUCT (NOTPROVIDED)

Horizoncompact2BTS

TX1 CABLECONNECTOR

MASTER (N-type)


Figure 1-19 DCS1800 Horizoncompact2 RF cabling without pole duct




68P02902W63-O

Horizoncompact2 and booster � back to back pole mounting

Figure 1-20 shows the power and RF cabling for Horizoncompact2 and boosterwhen mounted back to back on a pole.


RF CABLES

ANTENNACONNECTOR

ALARMS CABLE AC SUPPLY CABLE

AC SUPPLY CABLE

ALARMS CABLE

RF CABLES

DUCT (NOTPROVIDED)

Horizoncompact2BTS Horizoncompact2

BOOSTER

Figure 1-20 Power and RF cabling for Horizoncompact2 and booster whenpole mounted back to back

GSM-209-423 Mounting the BTS wall bracket

20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O Inst. 1�37

Mounting the BTS wall bracket

Introduction tomounting thewall bracket

The Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 BTS enclosure is wall mounted using acustom mounting bracket. This procedure provides information on mounting thewall bracket to the allocated position on the wall. It is necessary to mount thewall bracket before installing a Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 BTS or anyassociated cabling.

CAUTION It is recommended that local assistance is sought todetermine the correct type of fixing for the mounting sitematerial.Refer to the Mounting guidelines section for materialclassification and fixing guidelines.Bolts should be tightened to the specified torque using atorque wrench. The torque values should be chosen tosuit the wall material and the total weight of theHorizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 installation.

Tools

Mounting the wall bracket on a wall

This procedure requires the following tools:

S Heavy duty hammer drill.

S Masonry drill bits, of suitable diameter, 150 mm deep (or as required).

S Roll of insulating tape (or similar).

S Spirit level.

S Ratchet with suitable diameter socket.

S Torque wrench.

Mounting the wall bracket on a pole


S Spirit level.

S Ruler.

S Pole mount banding tool.

S Hammer.

GSM-209-423Mounting the BTS wall bracket



68P02902W63-O

Preparing thetools

Gather all required tools prior to ascending ladder or hydraulic lift cage.

NOTE Use of a tool belt is recommended.

Drilling holesfor themounting bolts

To drill the holes for the mounting bolts:

1. Seek local advice on the depth to drill the holes in the wall, then placetape on the drills to the required drilling depth.

2. Carefully position the wall bracket over the mounting point, in accordancewith the site plan. Ensure the wall bracket is level using the spirit level.

3. Use the wall bracket to mark the location of each of the three mountingholes (see Figure 1-22).

WARNING Wear safety glasses and a dust mask when drilling holes.

CAUTION Drilling masonry and brickwork produces dust, which isharmful to equipment and wiring.Protect the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 and anynearby equipment from dust.Use a waterproof, cloth or plastic sheeting to coverexposed equipment.Clean up any accumulated debris from the installationarea carefully before uncovering the equipment.

4. Drill the holes to the recommended depths.

5. Insert the recommended wall fixings.


20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O Inst. 1�39

Wall mounting

To mount the wall bracket:

1. How are the cable inputs to be routed to the wall bracket:

If ... Then ...

By conduit Go to step 2

No conduit Go to step 4

2. Locate the conduit termination bracket and fixings from installation kitcarton A.

3. Referencing Figure 1-21, place the conduit bracket on the front face ofthe wall bracket and attach using the two M8 screws, plain and springwashers and nuts provided. Attach from rear using the screws supplied.

CONDUIT TERMINATIONBRACKET

WALL BRACKET

Figure 1-21 Fixing the conduit termination bracket

4. Move the wall bracket to the installation point on the wall.

NOTE There are three mounting holes on the wall bracket. Referto Figure 1-22 for the locations.




68P02902W63-O

5. Align the holes in the wall bracket with the wall fixings. 11 mm diameterclearance holes are provided in the bracket.

6. Secure the wall bracket loosely to the wall using all three fixings.

7. Tighten all three fixings to the required torque.

NOTE The torque is dependent upon the type of material the wallbracket is mounted on and the type of fixings used. Seeklocal specialist assistance if necessary to determine therequired torque.

Figure 1-22 shows an Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 wall bracket.

WALL BRACKETFIXINGS

WALLBRACKET

Figure 1-22 Mounting the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 wall bracket


20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O Inst. 1�41

Pole mounting

To mount the wall bracket on a pole follow the procedures given below.

Mounting the wall bracket

1. Decide how the cable inputs are to be routed to the wall bracket:

If ... Then ...


Not by conduit Go to step 4

2. Locate the conduit termination bracket and fixings from installation kitcarton A.

3. Locate and secure the conduit termination bracket to the wall bracket(refer to Figure 1-21) using the two M6 screws and washers (plain andspring) provided.

4. Locate pole mounting fittings from installation kit carton A.

5. Referencing Figure 1-23 and Figure 1-24, proceed as follows:

Step Action

a. Fit the long C channel, using four M6 screws and spring washers,to the top crossbar of the wall mounting bracket, using T30tamperproof bit.

b. Fit the short C channel, using two M6 screws and springwashers, to the bottom crossbar of the wall mounting bracket,using T30 tamperproof bit.

c. Fit and centralize a clamping bracket to each of the C channels.

C CHANNEL

Figure 1-23 Completed pole mounting of wall bracket




68P02902W63-O

Fitting the bucklestraps

1. With reference to Figure 1-24, thread a bucklestrap, with ears towards thewall bracket, through each clamping bracket.

CLAMPING BRACKETSBUCKLE BUCKLESTRAP

WALLBRACKET

EARS LONG C CHANNEL SHORT C CHANNEL

Figure 1-24 Bucklestrap detail

2. Position and hold the wall bracket at the installation point on the pole,using the tie wrap provided from installation kit carton A.

3. Pass the top bucklestrap around the pole and up through the buckle,twice.

NOTE The buckle must be positioned such that there is sufficientclearance (minimum 330 mm long by 220 mm wide) toenable manipulation of the clamping tool in step 2.

4. Pull on the loose end of the bucklestrap until the wall bracket sits lightly onthe pole.


20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O Inst. 1�43

Using the clamping tool

1. With reference to Figure 1-25, prepare the clamping tool by ensuring thatthe handle is at the end of the thread and the gripper block is close to thenose of the tool.

HANDLE

CUTTER LEVER

GRIPPERLEVER

NOSE

GRIPPERBLOCK

Figure 1-25 Clamping tool

2. To use the clamping tool, (with reference to Figure 1-25):

Step Action

a. Holding the tool in the left hand, with the gripper lever uppermost,thread the bucklestrap through both the nose and gripper leverblock.

b. Push the nose of the tool against the buckle and grip thebucklestrap by applying thumb pressure on the gripper lever.

c. Keeping the applied thumb pressure on the gripper lever, tensionthe bucklestrap by turning the handle clockwise.

d. Swing the tool over the buckle, while maintaining bucklestraptension.NOTE: This movement increases the tension on the bucklestrapand, to avoid breakage, the handle must be reversed slightly asthe tool is swung over.

e. Cut the bucklestrap by pulling on the cutter lever, and slide tooloff in the same position or tension will be lost.

3. With reference to Figure 1-24, hammer down the ears over the cut andflattened bucklestrap.

4. Using a spirit level, verify that the wall bracket is positioned straight andlevel.

5. Repeat from step 3 in Fitting the bucklestraps to step 4 in Using theclamping tool for the bottom clamping bracket.

6. Cut the tie wrap.

GSM-209-423Mounting the booster wall bracket



68P02902W63-O

Mounting the booster wall bracket

Introduction tomounting thebooster

The Horizoncompact2 booster is mounted onto the wall using a custommounting bracket. This procedure provides information on mounting the wallbracket to the allocated position on the wall. It is necessary to mount the wallbracket before installing an Horizoncompact2 booster or any associated cabling.

CAUTION It is recommended that local assistance is sought todetermine the correct type of fixing for the mounting sitematerial.Refer to the Mounting guidelines section for materialclassification and fixing guidelines.Bolts should be tightened to the specified torque using atorque wrench. The torque values should be chosen tosuit the wall material and the total weight of theHorizoncompact2 booster installation.

Tools

Mounting the Horizoncompact2 booster wall bracket on a wall


S Heavy duty hammer drill.

S Masonry drill bits, of suitable diameter, 150 mm deep (or as required).

S Roll of insulating tape (or similar).

S Spirit level.

S Ratchet with suitable diameter socket.

S Torque wrench.

Mounting the Horizoncompact2 booster wall bracket on a pole


S Spirit level.

S Ruler.

S Pole mount banding tool.

S Hammer.

GSM-209-423 Mounting the booster wall bracket

20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O Inst. 1�45

Preparing thetools

Assemble all required tools prior to ascending ladder or hydraulic lift cage.

NOTE Use of a tool belt is recommended.

Drilling holesfor themounting bolts

To drill the holes for the mounting bolts:

1. Seek local advice on the depth to drill the holes in the wall, then placetape on the drills to the required drilling depth.

2. Carefully position the wall bracket over the mounting point, in accordancewith the site plan. Ensure the wall bracket is level using the spirit level.

3. Use the wall bracket to mark the location of each of the four mountingholes (see Figure 1-27).

WARNING Wear safety glasses and a dust mask when drilling holes.

CAUTION Drilling masonry and brickwork produces dust, which isharmful to equipment and wiring.Protect the Horizoncompact2, booster and any nearbyequipment from dust.Use a waterproof, cloth, or plastic sheeting to coverexposed equipment.Clean up any accumulated debris from the installationarea carefully before uncovering the equipment.

4. Drill the holes to the recommended depths.

5. Insert the recommended wall fixings.




68P02902W63-O

Wall mounting

To mount the wall bracket:

1. How are the cable inputs to be routed to the wall bracket:

If ... Then ...



2. Locate conduit termination bracket and fixings from the installation kitcarton A.

3. Referencing Figure 1-26, 2 x M8 screws are located on the conduitbracket (they are attached to fixed M8 nuts). Remove the screws from theconduit bracket. Place the conduit bracket behind the bottom front lip ofthe wall bracket and attach using the two M8 screws then tighten to therequired torque.

Figure 1-26 Fixing the conduit termination bracket (GSM900 version shown)


20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O Inst. 1�47

4. As the wall bracket weights approximately 4 kg, care should be takenwhen handling. Move the wall bracket to the installation point on the wall.There are four mounting holes on the wall bracket. Refer to Figure 1-27 forthe locations.

5. Align the holes in the wall bracket with the wall fixings. 11 mm diameterclearance holes are provided in the bracket.

6. Secure the wall bracket loosely to the wall using all four fixings.

7. Tighten all four fixings to the required torque.

NOTE The torque depends upon the type of material the wallbracket is mounted on and the type of fixings used. Seeklocal specialist assistance if necessary to determine therequired torque.

Figure 1-27 shows a diagram of the booster bracket.

WALL BRACKET

WALL BRACKETFIXINGS

Figure 1-27 Mounting the booster wall bracket (GSM900 version shown)




68P02902W63-O

Pole mountingTo mount the wall bracket on a pole, follow the procedure given below.

Mounting the wall bracket

1. Decide how the cable inputs are to be routed to the wall bracket:

If ... Then ...



2. Locate conduit termination bracket and fixings from the installation kitcarton A.

3. Referencing Figure 1-26 and Figure 1-28, 2 x M8 screws are located onthe conduit bracket (they are attached to fixed M8 nuts). Remove thescrews from the conduit bracket. Place the conduit bracket behind thebottom front lip of the wall bracket, and attach using the two M8 screws,then tighten to the required torque.

4. As the wall bracket weights approximately 4 kg, care should be takenwhen handling. Locate pole mounting fittings from installation kit carton A.

5. Referencing Figure 1-28 and Figure 1-29, proceed as follows:

Step Action

a. Fit the top long C channel with clamping bracket, using three M6screws and spring washers, to the top section of the wallmounting bracket, using T30 tamperproof bit.

b. Fit the bottom long C channel with clamping bracket, using threeM6 screws and spring washers, to the bottom section of the wallmounting bracket, using T30 tamperproof bit.

TOP LONG C CHANNEL

BOTTOM LONG C CHANNEL

6 x M6 NUT (fitted with tamperproof socket)

AND WASHER

Figure 1-28 Completed pole mounting of wall bracket (GSM900 version shown)


20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O Inst. 1�49

Fitting the bucklestraps

1. Referencing Figure 1-29, thread a bucklestrap, with ears towards the wallbracket, through each clamping bracket.

CLAMPING BRACKETSBUCKLE BUCKLESTRAP

WALLBRACKET

EARS

LONG C CHANNEL

M6 SCREW ANDWASHER

Figure 1-29 Bucklestrap detail

2. Position and hold the wall bracket at the installation point on the pole,using the tie wrap provided from installation kit carton A.

3. Pass the top bucklestrap around the pole and up through the buckle,twice.

NOTE The buckle must be positioned such that there is sufficientclearance (minimum 330 mm long by 220 mm wide) toenable manipulation of the clamping tool in step 2.

4. Pull on the loose end of the bucklestrap until the wall bracket sits lightly onthe pole.




68P02902W63-O

Using the clamping tool

1. With reference to Figure 1-30, prepare the clamping tool by ensuring thatthe handle is at the end of the thread and the gripper block is close to thenose of the tool.

HANDLE

CUTTER LEVER

GRIPPERLEVER

NOSE

GRIPPERBLOCK

Figure 1-30 Clamping tool

2. To use the clamping tool (Figure 1-30), follow these procedures:

Step Action

a. Holding the tool in the left hand with the gripper lever uppermost,thread the bucklestrap through both the nose and gripper leverblock.

b. Push the nose of the tool against the buckle and grip thebucklestrap by applying thumb pressure on the gripper lever.

c. Keeping the applied thumb pressure on the gripper lever, tensionthe bucklestrap by turning the handle clockwise.

d. Swing the tool over the buckle, while maintaining bucklestraptension.NOTE: This movement increases the tension on the bucklestrapand, to avoid breakage, the handle must be reversed slightly asthe tool is swung over.

e. Cut the bucklestrap by pulling on the cutter lever and slide tooloff in the same position or tension will be lost.

3. Referencing Figure 1-29, hammer down the ears over the cut andflattened bucklestrap.

4. Using a spirit level, verify that the wall bracket is positioned straight andlevel.

5. Repeat from step 3 in Fitting the bucklestraps to step 4 in Using theclamping tool for the bottom clamping bracket.

6. Cut the tie wrap.

GSM-209-423 Power and earth cabling

20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O Inst. 1�51

Power and earth cabling

Introduction topower and earthcabling

This section provides the required specifications of ac power supply isolation,cabling, and cable routeing to be provided for the Horizonmicro2 andHorizoncompact2 enclosures. Use national regulations or refer to Requirementsfor Electrical Installations (16th Edition) BS 7671 (IEC364). The Horizonmicro2and Horizoncompact2 has been designed to be connected to a Terra Neutral(TN) ac supply network only (this is a system of having one or more points of thesource of energy directly earthed, the exposed conductive parts of theinstallation being connected to that point by protective conductors).

AC isolatorAn ac overcurrent circuit breaker and residual current device (RCD) must beused in the ac power supply feed to the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2enclosure. This circuit breaker should be of dual pole type, with sufficientcontactor gap to be used as an isolator, and should meet the requirements ofstandard EN 60898.

The maximum power requirement current rating is:

S 4 A at 230 V ac heaters on.

S 8 A at 110 V ac heaters on.

Power cablingthermalproperties

Materials and installations method should comply with REC or nationalstandards. Where no suitable requirements exist, the thermal properties ofcabling used to supply power must meet the following specifications:

Cable type

3-core power cable, either armoured or conduit routed, chosen to be suitable forthe operating environment. This must be used to ensure the connector cablegland seals correctly.

Maximum conductor temperature

Continuous operation: +105 _C.

Emergency operation: +130 _C (max. 125 hours/year).

Short circuit condition: +160 _C (max. 5 seconds).

Resistance to flame

The cabling used to supply power should be of low-smoke halogen-freeclassification, with flame-retardant properties and with resistance to flame testedto IEC 332-3 (IEC 332-1).

GSM-209-423Power and earth cabling



68P02902W63-O

Cable routeing

WARNING Do not make ac input power connections at the main acpower source at this time.

An adequate means should be provided for routeing cables from the mainpower source to the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 enclosure. To preventthe possibility of damage to exposed cables, Motorola recommends that acpower cables are armoured or routed inside a conduit.

NOTE The E1 link must be routed to the Horizonmicro2 orHorizoncompact2 enclosure in a separate conduit from theac power cable.

GSM-209-423 Installing BTS enclosure power and earth cabling

20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O Inst. 1�53

Installing BTS enclosure power and earth cabling

Introduction toinstalling BTSpower and earthcabling

WARNING The Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 enclosure mustbe earthed with a conductor which complies with therequirements for the protection from electric shock, asspecified in national regulations or refer to Requirementsfor Electrical Installations (16th Edition) BS 7671 (IEC364).Consideration should also be made on the lightningprotection earthing requirements.Equipment earths should not be daisy chained together.

This section describes the procedure for routeing power and earth cabling to thewall bracket prior to installation of the chassis.

Tools


S Screwdriver set.

S Wire stripping tool.

S Crimping tool.

S Small hacksaw.

AC powerschematic

Figure 1-31 shows a schematic of the ac supply power installation.

CUSTOMER CABLE TOREQUIRED LENGTH

CUSTOMER ACISOLATOR

AC POWERCONNECTOR


(IF APPLICABLE)

Horizonmicro2 ORHorizoncompact2 BTS

Figure 1-31 Schematic of ac supply power installation

GSM-209-423Installing BTS enclosure power and earth cabling



68P02902W63-O

AC powerconnector

The ac power connector is supplied with a seal. The connections are:


S 1 is the neutral cable, coloured blue or black.

S 2 is the live power cable, coloured brown or red.

S EARTH (top socket) is the earth cable, coloured green and yellow.

S 3 is not used.

WARNING If the installation being carried out is to be completed at alater date (only the wall mounting bracket being installed)care should be taken to ensure that no ac powerconnections are left live. Ensure that an indication of thestate of ac terminations is left with the unit by taping offpotential live cables and by a clear warning label. Thesource should be isolated and locked and a warning labelattached.

Figure 1-32 shows the ac power connector in detail.

(NOT USED)

SOCKET CONNECTOR FROMSUPPLY CABLE TO ATTACH AS

SHOWN

(NOT USED)

LIVE(BROWN OR RED)

AC POWER SOCKET

AC POWER PLUG ONHorizonmicro2 ORHorizoncompact2

EARTH(GREEN AND YELLOW)

NEUTRAL(BLUE OR BLACK)

AC SUPPLY CABLE

EARTH (GREEN AND YELLOW) EARTH

(GREEN ANDYELLOW)

RUBBERWASHER

METALWASHER

CONNECT BLOCK

LN

E

SCREW


Figure 1-32 AC power socket and plug


20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O Inst. 1�55

AC powerconnectorprocedure

Proceed as follows to attach the ac power connector to the customer cable:

WARNING Ensure the mains ac power supply input has been safelyisolated, so that there is no risk of power being applied tothe cable during this procedure. The source should beisolated and locked, and warning label attached.

1. Remove the connector cover.

2. Connect the cables as indicated in Figure 1-32.

3. Refit the connector cover, ensuring that the seal is correctly located andthe cable gland is tightened.

Earthconnectionpoints

Figure 1-33 provides a view of the wall bracket, showing the main earthingpoint.


CHASSIS

Figure 1-33 Wall bracket, showing earth connection point




68P02902W63-O

Installing thepower andE1/HDSL cableconduits

Figure 1-34 provides a view of the power and E1/HDSL conduits, attached tothe conduit termination bracket.

CONDUIT TERMINATIONBRACKET

WALLBRACKET

CONDUIT FOR E1/HDSL CABLE(S)

CONDUIT FOR AC POWER

NOTE: THE AC POWER AND E1/HDSL CABLES ARE NOT SHOWN.

WALL BRACKET EARTHTERMINAL

TIP OFCONDUITS

21 mm DIAMETER

21 mm DIAMETER

CONDUIT CABLES AND GLANDS ARE NOT SUPPLIED.

Figure 1-34 Attaching the conduits to the conduit termination bracket

CAUTION To prevent water ingress into the conduit, an appropriatesilicone sealant must be applied to the tip of the conduitcable and gland. Silicone sealant should also be appliedto all exposed armoured shielding on the ac power cableto prevent water ingress.


20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O Inst. 1�57

Routeing the ac power cable to the wall bracket

To install the conduit and attach to the conduit termination bracket:

WARNING If the installation being carried out is to be completed at alater date (only the wall mounting bracket being installed)care should be taken to ensure that no ac powerconnections are left live. Ensure that an indication of thestate of ac terminations is left with the unit by taping offpotential live cables and by a clear warning label. Thesource should be isolated and locked, and a warning labelattached.

1. Measure the length of cable conduit required to connect the wall bracketto the ac supply power isolator, and cut the conduit to this length.

2. Route the conduit from the ac power isolator to the wall bracket.

3. Connect the conduit to the conduit termination bracket.

4. Feed the ac power cable through the conduit, but do not connect thecables to the isolator at this time.

NOTE The conduit termination bracket is attached to the bottomof the wall bracket. See Figure 1-34 for a view of theconduit termination bracket.




68P02902W63-O

Connectingcables to the acpower supplyisolator

An upstream ac supply isolator must be fitted and installed complying withregional electric company (REC) requirements or national requirements. Whereno suitable requirements exist in order to connect the earth, live and neutralcables to the power supply isolator:

WARNING Ensure the mains ac power supply input isolator switch isin the OFF position before proceeding.If the installation being carried out is to be completed at alater date (only the wall mounting bracket being installed)care should be taken to ensure that no ac powerconnections are left live. Ensure that an indication of thestate of ac terminations is left with the unit by taping offpotential live cables and by a clear warning label. Thesource should be isolated and locked and a warning labelattached.

1. Remove the screws and washers securing the ac terminal block insulatedcover, and remove the cover.

2. If armoured cable is used, secure the screen at the entry gland.


3. Connect the earth ac cable (green/yellow) to the earth point in the acpower input isolator and secure.

4. Connect the live ac cable (brown or red) to the live connection in the acinput isolator and secure.

5. Connect the neutral ac cable (blue or black), to the neutral connection inthe ac power input isolator and secure.

6. Refit and secure the terminal block insulated cover and refit the screwsand washers.


20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O Inst. 1�59

Connecting thesite main earth

The main site earth is to be connected to the wall bracket and then a jumpercable connected to the main earth stud on the chassis.

To connect the main site earth to the wall bracket:

1. Route a cable from the site main earth to the wall bracket.

2. Strip approximately 10 mm of the insulation from the end of the site mainearth cable to expose the bare copper conductor.

3. Crimp an M8 post connector to the main earth conductor.

4. Fit a star washer over the M8 main earthing stud, located on the bottomedge of the wall bracket.

5. Place the earth post connector over the M8 main earthing stud, located onthe bottom edge of the wall bracket.

NOTE Figure 1-34 shows the location of the wall bracket mainearthing stud.

6. Fit a star washer and M8 nut over the top of the connector onto the mainearthing stud and tighten to a torque of 10 Nm.

GSM-209-423Installing booster power and earth cabling



68P02902W63-O

Installing booster power and earth cabling

Introduction tobooster powerand earthcabling

This section describes the procedure for routeing power and earth cabling to theHorizoncompact2 booster wall bracket prior to installation of the chassis.

WARNING The booster must be earthed with a conductor whichcomplies with the requirements for the protection fromelectric shock, as specified in national regulations or referto Requirements for Electrical Installations (16th Edition)BS 7671 (IEC364). Consideration should also be made onthe lightning protection grounding requirements.Equipment earths should not be daisy chained together.

Tools


S Screwdriver set.

S Wire stripping tool.

S Crimping tool.

S Small hacksaw.

AC powerschematic

Figure 1-35 shows a schematic of the ac power installation.

CUSTOMER CABLE TOREQUIRED LENGTH

CUSTOMER MAINSISOLATOR

AC POWERCONNECTOR


Horizoncompact2BTS

Figure 1-35 Schematic of ac power installation

GSM-209-423 Installing booster power and earth cabling

20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O Inst. 1�61

AC powerconnector

The ac power connector is supplied with seal. The connections are:


S 1 is the neutral power cable, coloured blue or black.

S 2 is the live power cable, coloured brown or red.

S EARTH (top socket) is the earth cable, coloured green and yellow.

S 3 is not used.

WARNING If the installation being carried out is to be completed at alater date (only the wall mounting bracket being installed)care should be taken to ensure that no ac powerconnections are left live. Ensure that an indication of thestate of ac terminations is left with the unit by taping offpotential live cables and by a clear warning label. Thesource should be isolated and locked and a warning labelattached.

Figure 1-36 shows the booster ac power connector in detail.

(NOT USED)


SHOWN

(NOT USED)

LIVE (BROWN OR RED)

AC POWER SOCKET

AC POWER PLUG ONHorizoncompact2

BOOSTER


AC SUPPLY CABLE

EARTH (GREENAND YELLOW)

EARTH (GREEN AND YELLOW)

RUBBERWASHER

METALWASHER

CONNECT BLOCK

LN

E

SCREW


EARTH (GREENAND YELLOW)

Figure 1-36 Booster ac socket and plug




68P02902W63-O

AC powerconnectorprocedure

Proceed as follows to attach the ac power connector to the customer cable:

WARNING Ensure the ac power supply input has been safely isolatedso that there is no risk of power being applied to the cableduring this procedure. The source should be isolated andlocked and a warning label attached.

1. Remove the connector cover.

2. Connect the cables as indicated in Figure 1-36.

3. Refit the connector cover, ensuring that the seal is correctly located andthe cable gland tightened.

Earthconnectionpoint

Figure 1-37 provides a view of the Horizoncompact2 booster wall bracket,showing the main earthing point.

An earth cable is attached to the wall bracket earth stud (it consists of starwasher, earth cable connector, star washer and an M8 nut (tightened to10 Nm)). Sufficient length of earth cable is provided to attach to theHorizoncompact2 booster stud.

EARTH CABLE

WALL BRACKETEARTH

Figure 1-37 Booster wall bracket, showing earth connection points (GSM900version shown)


20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O Inst. 1�63

Installing theac power cable

If conduit is used, Figure 1-38 provides a view of the power and alarm cableconduits, attached to the conduit termination bracket.

CONDUIT FOR AC POWER CABLE CONDUIT FOR ALARM CABLE(BOX TYPE SHOWN)

CONDUIT TERMINATION BRACKET

20.5 mm DIAMETER

TIP OFCONDUIT

16 mm DIAMETER

20.5 mm DIAMETER

TIP OFCONDUIT

NOTE: CONDUIT CABLES AND GLANDS ARE NOT SUPPLIED.

Figure 1-38 Attaching the conduits to the conduit termination bracket (GSM900version shown)

CAUTION To prevent water ingress in the conduit, an appropriatesilicone sealant must be applied to the tip of the conduitcable and gland. Silicone sealant should also be appliedto all exposed armoured shielding on the ac power cableto prevent water ingress.




68P02902W63-O

Routeing the ac power cable to the wall bracket

To install the conduit and attach to the conduit termination bracket:

WARNING If the installation being carried out is to be completed at alater date (only the wall mounting bracket being installed),care should be taken to ensure that no ac powerconnections are left floating. Ensure that an indication ofthe state of ac terminations is left with the unit by tapingoff potential live cables and by a clear warning label. Thesource should be isolated and locked and a warning labelattached.

1. Measure the length of cable conduit required to connect the booster wallbracket to the ac power isolator, and cut the conduit to this length.

2. Route the conduit from the ac power isolator to the booster wall bracket.


4. Feed the ac power cable through the conduit, but do not connect thecables to the isolator at this time.

NOTE The conduit termination bracket is attached to the bottomof the wall bracket. See Figure 1-38 for a view of theconduit termination bracket.


20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O Inst. 1�65

Connectingcables to the acpower supplyisolator

An upstream ac supply isolator must be fitted and installed complying withregional electric company (REC) requirements or national requirements. Whereno suitable requirements exist in order to connect the earth, live and neutralcables to the power supply isolator:

WARNING Ensure the ac power supply input isolator switch is in theOFF position before proceeding.If the installation being carried out is to be completed at alater date (only the wall mounting bracket being installed),care should be taken to ensure that no ac powerconnections are left floating. Ensure that an indication ofthe state of ac terminations is left with the unit by tapingoff potential live cables and by a clear warning label. Thesource should be isolated and locked and a warning labelattached.

1. Remove the screws and washers securing the ac terminal block insulatedcover and remove the cover.

2. If armoured cable is used, secure the screen at the entry gland.


3. Connect the earth ac cable (green/yellow) to the earth point in the ac inputisolator and secure.

4. Connect the live ac cable (brown or red) to the live connection in the acinput isolator, and secure.

5. Connect the neutral ac cable (blue or black), to the neutral connection inthe ac input isolator and secure.

6. Refit and secure the terminal block insulated cover and refit the screwsand washers.




68P02902W63-O

Connecting thesupplementaryearth

The supplementary earth is connected to the wall bracket as follows:

1. Route a cable from the site main earth to the wall bracket.

2. Strip approximately 10 mm of the insulation from the end of the site mainearth cable to expose the bare copper conductor.

3. Crimp an M8 post connector to the main earth conductor.

4. Fit a star washer over the M8 main earthing stud, located on the bottomedge of the wall bracket.

5. Place the earth post connector over the M8 main earthing stud, located onthe bottom edge of the wall bracket.

NOTE Figure 1-37 shows the location of the wall bracket mainearthing stud.

6. Fit a star washer and M8 nut over the top of the connector onto the mainearthing stud and tighten to a torque of 10 Nm.

GSM-209-423 External antenna cabling guidelines

20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O Inst. 1�67

External antenna cabling guidelines

Externalantenna cablingguidelines

Refer to the site specific documentation for detailed antenna configurations andconnection procedures. Observe the following guidelines when installing RFcables:

S Fabricate the RF cables on-site.

S Keep the RF cables as short as possible to minimize signal losses.

RF connectors

Horizonmicro2

The Horizonmicro2 has only one Rx/Tx connector for an external antenna. Theother two connector positions are blanked off.

Horizoncompact2

The Horizoncompact2 has three RF connectors, these are used to connect theBTS to the booster unit.

S Rx.

S Tx1.

S Tx2.


There are five RF connectors on the Horizoncompact2 booster. Two are usedfor external antenna connection, the other three are for connection to the BTS.

S Antenna 1 (ANT1).

S Antenna 2 (ANT2).

S Rx.

S Tx1.

S Tx2.

NOTE The Rx is duplexed on ANT1 with Tx1.

GSM-209-423E1/HDSL link



68P02902W63-O

E1/HDSL link

Introduction toE1/HDSL link

The following provides information on the network link cabling used in theHorizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 equipment.

NOTE The internal control signal cabling within eachHorizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 is assembled andtested at the factory. No further action is necessary.

E1/HDSL linkconnections

CAUTION All cables must be armoured or routed inside armouredconduit if there is any possibility of exposed cables to/fromthe Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 being damaged orinterfered with in any way.

NOTE The end user is responsible for transient protection of theE1 link connected to Motorola equipment.

In indoor installations, Motorola requires that all E1 link lines brought fromoutside the building are spark-gap (three-anode gas tube) protected at thebuilding entry point. Where this is not practical, the end user may purchase anoptional transient-protection board from Motorola. Consult Motorola abouttransient protection for the Horizonmicro2 Horizoncompact2 sites.

There are three ways to make line connections:

S 120 ohm (E1) twisted pair cable through a line termination modulemounted on the underside of the chassis, underneath the customerinterface cover.

S 75 ohm (E1) coaxial cable through a line termination module mounted onthe underside of the chassis, underneath the customer interface cover.

S 135 ohm twisted pair cable through a HDSL line interface (modem)mounted on the underside of the chassis, underneath the customerinterface cover.

An adequate means should be provided for routeing E1/HDSL link cables fromand to the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2. To prevent the possibility ofdamage to exposed cables, Motorola recommends that the E1/HDSL link cablesare routed inside a conduit.

NOTE The ac power cable is to be routed to the Horizonmicro2or Horizoncompact2 in a separate conduit.

GSM-209-423 E1/HDSL link

20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O Inst. 1�69

Terminology forTx and Rx

The use of Tx and Rx as driver/receiver designators refer to the network asperceived by the Horizoncompact2 BTS enclosure:

S Tx indicates the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 BTS connection isdriving into the network.

S Rx indicates the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 BTS connection isreceiving from the network.

GSM-209-423Installing E1/HDSL link cabling



68P02902W63-O

Installing E1/HDSL link cabling

Introduction toinstallingE1/HDSL linkcabling

This section describes the procedure for installing E1/HDSL link cabling.

Tools required

The installation procedure requires the following tools:

S Screwdriver set.

S Ratchet with socket set.

S Wire stripping and crimping tool.

Routeing theE1/HDSL link tothe wall bracket

To route the E1/HDSL link to the wall bracket:

1. Feed the E1/HDSL link cable(s) through the conduit.

2. Route the conduit from the E1/HDSL link connection point to the wallbracket.


If multiple cables are used for the E1/HDSL conduit, an appropriate seal mustbe used.

NOTE The conduit termination bracket is attached to the bottomof the wall bracket.Cables to be used for the E1/HDSL link should bepre-terminated with the appropriate connector(s).

E1 cablingdistance/loss

Recommended distances can only be stated in the form of cable losses:

S E1 links should involve cable losses of less than 6 dB.

GSM-209-423 Installing E1/HDSL link cabling

20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O Inst. 1�71

HDSL cablingguidelines

HDSL cable selection


To install the twisted pair connection between the BSC cabinet and theHorizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 BTS enclosures, or between twoHorizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 BTS enclosures, select or install suitabletwisted pair cables between the sites. This needs to comply with the followingselection guidelines:

S Up to two pairs of conductors are required between the Horizonmicro2 orHorizoncompact2 BTS and the BSC cabinet, or between twoHorizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 BTS enclosures. The two pairstogether comprise a single HDSL link and must share the same connectorat both ends.

S Each tip and ring pair between the BSC cabinet and Horizonmicro2 orHorizoncompact2 BTS must be of a twisted construction.

S The tip and ring must not be mixed between the pairs; that is, tip 1 mustnot be used as a pair with ring 2.

S Either unshielded twisted pair (UTP) or shielded twisted pair (STP) may beused. Shielding may be required to comply with specific RFI requirementsat the site.

S Attenuation at 260 kHz should be less than 10.5 dB/km.

HDSL recommended cable types

Some types of cable are known to perform suitably in HDSL applications,provided they are correctly installed and the guidelines for selection andinstallation are observed. Recommendations for types of cable are as follows:

S Unshielded twisted pair:

� BT CW1308 and equivalents.

� Category 3 UTP.

� Category 4 UTP.

� Category 5 UTP.

S Shielded twisted pair:

� Category 3 STP.

� Category 4 STP.

� Category 5 STP.

GSM-209-423Installing E1/HDSL link cabling



68P02902W63-O

Cable types not recommended

The performance of some types of cable is known to be unacceptable for HDSLapplications. The following cable types should be avoided:

S Twisted quad cable is unsuitable for use in HDSL applications and mustnot be used.

S Drop wire that consists of two parallel conductors with supporting steelcable. This will work with HDSL but because it is not twisted, it provideslittle immunity from noise, and is therefore not recommended.

S Information cable is typically of non-twisted, multicore construction, forexample ribbon cable. Its use is not recommended.

HDSL cable installation

NOTE The cable installation must meet the HDSL recommendedcable types guidelines given above.

Follow the guidelines below if cabling does not exist between the BSC cabinetand the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 BTS enclosures, or between twoHorizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 BTS enclosures:

S Two conductor pairs should be connected between a single Horizonmicro2or Horizoncompact2 BTS and the BSC, or the second Horizonmicro2 orHorizoncompact2 BTS; that is, point-to-point only, not point to multipoint.The two pairs must share the same connector at both ends.

S The use of different gauges of cable in one link should be avoided.

S Bridge taps in the cable run should be avoided.

S Loading coils in the cable run must be removed.

S The isolation between tip and ring should be greater than 1 Mohm (atSELV voltage levels).

S The isolation between tip and earth should be greater than 1 Mohm (atSELV voltage levels).

S The isolation between ring and earth should be greater than 1 Mohm (atSELV voltage levels).

20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O i

Chapter 2

Installation procedures

GSM-209-423

20th Sep 02ii


68P02902W63-O

GSM-209-423

20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O iii

Chapter 2Installation procedures i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of installation procedures Inst. 2�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction to the procedures Inst. 2�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation procedures Inst. 2�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E1 link testing Inst. 2�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torque values Inst. 2�2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessing the equipment Inst. 2�3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .










GSM-209-423

20th Sep 02iv


68P02902W63-O



GSM-209-423 Overview of installation procedures

20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O Inst. 2�1

Overview of installation procedures

Introduction tothe procedures

This chapter provides the information required to install a Horizonmicro2 orHorizoncompact2 enclosure and its internal and external interfaces.

NOTE Some equipment at the site may not be produced byMotorola. Examples of such equipment may includebattery chargers, power supplies, and antennas. Refer tosite specific documentation and the vendor instructionsprovided with non Motorola equipment.

Before starting an installation, prepare the site according to the description inChapter 1 of this category and the site specific documentation.

Installationprocedures

Installing the equipment consists of the procedures described in Table 2-1.

Table 2-1 Installation procedures

Procedure Description

Unpacking the BTS andbooster* chassis equipment.

Provides the procedures for removing thechassis from the packaging.

Installing the BTS andbooster* chassis.

Provides the procedures for mounting thechassis.

Connecting power, antenna,E1/HDSL and earth cables.

Describes external cable connections.

Fitting the battery. The battery is packed separate from thechassis and must be fitted after installation ofthe chassis.

Installing the solar cover. Provides the procedure for enclosing thechassis at the completion of installation.Covers the Horizonmicro2, Horizoncompact2and booster.

* The booster is supplied with Horizoncompact2 only.

NOTE All site equipment associated with the enclosure must becompletely installed before commissioning the equipmentfor operation.Equipment does not include a battery charger.

E1 link testing

If an E1 link has been provided, contact the local mobile switching centre (MSC)and arrange to test the line back to the BSC at the earliest opportunity.

GSM-209-423Overview of installation procedures



68P02902W63-O

Torque values

The torque values listed in Table 2-2 are to be used when installing theHorizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 equipment.

Table 2-2 Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 torque values

Item Size/Type Torque Where

BTS chassis

Chassis earth stud M8 nut 10 Nm Field only

Customer interface cover(clamp)Sealant cover

Strain relief clamp

M5 Torx

M5 Torx

M3 Torx

3.4 Nm

3.4 Nm

1.2 Nm

Field only

Field only

Field only

Battery/Battery cover M5 Torx 3.4 Nm Field only

Expansion casting M5 Torx 3.4 Nm Field only

Chassis/wall bracket M8 skt hd 10 Nm Field only

Transport handle M6 Torx 3.4 Nm Factory & field

BTS cover

Solar cover/chassis M5 Torx 3.4 Nm Field only

Booster chassis


Security bracket M8 skt hd 10 Nm Field only


Transport handle M8 skt hd 10 Nm Factory & field

Booster cover


Fibre optic expansion


Fibre cable M5 Torx 3.4 Nm Field only

GSM-209-423 Overview of installation procedures

20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O Inst. 2�3

Accessing theequipment

WARNING Observe all relevant safety requirements when workingabove ground level.It is recommended that a suitable safety harness(EN355/European standard), attached to the cage of thehydraulic lift via a shock absorber, is worn by all staffworking above ground level.

Hydraulic lift

WARNING The operating instructions for the hydraulic lift should beread before use, and all applicable warnings and cautionsshould be observed.

It is recommended that a hydraulic lift is used to access the equipment if it ismounted above ground/floor level. Consideration should be given to therequired safe lifting capacity of the hydraulic lift, allowing adequate capacity fortwo people with tools, plus the equipment to be installed.

Scaffolding/platform

WARNING The scaffolding and platform should have a stabilizerfitted, which should be used to keep the platform stablewhen in use.

Under certain circumstances, it may be more appropriate to use scaffolding, witha platform, to access the equipment as an alternative to a hydraulic lift.Consideration should be given to the required safe load-bearing capacity of thescaffolding, allowing adequate capacity for two people with tools, plus theequipment to be installed.

Ladders

WARNING The ladders should be secured to keep them stable whenin use.

Under certain circumstances, it may be more appropriate to use ladders toaccess the equipment as an alternative to a hydraulic lift. Consideration shouldbe given to the required safe load-bearing capacity of the ladders.

GSM-209-423BTS equipment delivery and packaging



68P02902W63-O

BTS equipment delivery and packaging

Chassisequipment

The Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 BTS chassis are deliveredpre-configured and are ready to be installed and connected.

The BTS chassis is packed in a polythene protective barrier bag for shippingand storage. The barrier bag and desiccant should be discarded withenvironmental consideration.

The BTS chassis equipment is shipped in a recycleable cardboard container.The contents of the container are shown in Figure 2-1.

Figure 2-1 BTS chassis and shipping container (carton C)

GSM-209-423 Unpacking the chassis equipment

20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O Inst. 2�5

Unpacking the chassis equipment

Introduction tothe unpacking

The following describes the procedure for opening the shipping container andunpacking the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 chasses. See BTSequipment delivery and packaging for packaging details.

Tools required

This procedure requires a knife.

Unpacking theequipment

WARNING An equipped Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 chassis(without battery or cover) weighs 21 kg. Fully fitted weightcan be 28 kg.Handle with extreme care and observe normal handlingprecautions when lifting and carrying.

CAUTION Take care to ensure the equipment is not scratched ordamaged in any way while being unpacked.The chassis should not be removed from the protectivebarrier bag until the equipment is ready to be installed andpowered up.If the protective barrier bag has been removed, and theunit cannot be immediately installed and powered up, thechassis should be stored in a weather protectedenvironment.

To remove the chassis, carry out the following procedure:

NOTE The removal of cartons A, B and C from the shippingcontainer is described in Chapter 1 of this category.

1. Cut open the sealed environmental bag containing the chassis carton C,taking care not to damage the equipment in any way.

2. Remove the cardboard cover, and carefully lift the chassis out of carton C.The bag and carton C remain in the main cardboard container.

3. Inspect the equipment immediately for damage. Report the extent of anydamage to the transport company.

GSM-209-423Booster equipment delivery and packaging



68P02902W63-O

Booster equipment delivery and packaging

Chassisequipment

The Horizoncompact2 booster chassis is delivered pre-configured and is readyto be installed and connected.

The booster chassis is packed in a polythene protective barrier bag for shippingand storage. The barrier bag and desiccant should be discarded withenvironmental consideration.

The booster chassis equipment is shipped in a recycleable cardboard container.The contents of the container are shown in Figure 2-2.

GSM900 VERSION SHOWN

Figure 2-2 Booster chassis and shipping container (carton C)

GSM-209-423 Unpacking the booster equipment

20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O Inst. 2�7

Unpacking the booster equipment

Introduction tounpacking theequipment

The following describes the procedure for dismantling the shipping containerand unpacking the Horizoncompact2 booster chassis. See Booster equipmentdelivery and packaging for packaging details.

Tools required

This procedure requires a knife.

Unpacking theequipment

WARNING An equipped Horizonmicro2 GSM900 booster chassis(without battery or cover) weighs 21 kg; fully fitted weightcan be 28 kg. The DCS1800 version weighs 19 kg(without battery or cover) or 24 kg fully equipped.Handle with extreme care and observe normal handlingprecautions when lifting and carrying.

CAUTION Take care to ensure the equipment is not scratched ordamaged in any way during this procedure.The chassis should not be removed from the protectivebarrier bag until the equipment is ready to be installed andpowered up.If the protective barrier bag has been removed and theunit cannot be immediately installed and powered up, thechassis should be stored in a weather protectedenvironment.

To remove the booster chassis, carry out the following procedure:

NOTE The removal of cartons A, B and C from the shippingcontainer is described in Chapter 1 of this category.

1. Cut open the sealed environmental bag containing the chassis carton C,taking care not to damage the equipment in any way.

2. Remove the cardboard cover, and carefully lift the chassis out of carton C.The bag and carton C remain in the main cardboard container.

3. Inspect the equipment immediately for damage. Report the extent of anydamage to the transport company.

GSM-209-423Installing the BTS chassis



68P02902W63-O

Installing the BTS chassis

Introduction toinstallation ofthe BTS

This procedure provides instructions for installing the Horizonmicro2 andHorizoncompact2 BTS chassis onto the wall bracket.

CAUTION The chassis should not be removed from the protectivebarrier bag until the equipment is ready to be installed andpowered up.If the protective barrier bag has been removed and theunit cannot be immediately installed and powered up, thechassis should be stored in a weather protectedenvironment.

Tools required


S Screwdriver set.

S Ratchet, with 1/4 inch drive socket to fit 6 mm hex tool bit.

S Torque wrench.

CAUTION Bolts should be tightened to the specified torque using atorque wrench. The torque values are provided earlier inthis chapter.

GSM-209-423 Installing the BTS chassis

20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O Inst. 2�9

Equipmentaccessprocedure

The preferred method of access for Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2equipment fitted above ground/floor level is using a hydraulic lift. Scaffolding orladders can be used if appropriate, or if a hydraulic lift is not available.

NOTE Exercise great care when using hydraulic lifting gear andobserve all instruction and safety precautions.If the installation is being carried out in a public area, asuitable area around the site of the installation must becordoned off to prevent members of the public accessingthe site.If possible, a third member of the installation team shouldbe stationed at the site to ensure that the designated sitearea is not accessed by members of the public.

To access the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 equipment using a hydrauliclift:


1. Move the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 chassis to the cage of thehydraulic lift.

2. Collect the necessary tools and equipment, and enter the cage of thehydraulic lift.

3. Carefully manoeuvre the cage of the hydraulic lift until it is adjacent to theinstallation point on the wall, so that the Horizonmicro2 orHorizoncompact2 chassis is as close as possible to the wall bracket.

GSM-209-423Installing the BTS chassis



68P02902W63-O

Installing thechassis ontothe wall bracket

To install the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 chassis:


1. Using the handles either side of the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2BTS chassis, align and locate the lugs on the back of the chassis onto theforks on either side of the wall bracket (see Figure 2-3).

2. Using the two long M8 bolts and washers supplied, secure the top of theHorizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 BTS chassis to the wall bracket.

3. Using the short M8 bolt and washers supplied, secure the bottom of theHorizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 chassis to the bottom fixing of themounting bracket.

4. Tighten the three M8 bolts to the correct torque.

WARNING The carrying/lifting handles should only be removed afterthe chassis has been fully secured with the three M8 bolts.

5. Remove the three M6 screws securing each carrying/lifting handle to thesides of the chassis. Remove both handles and store for future use, withthe six M6 retaining screws.

GSM-209-423 Installing the BTS chassis

20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O Inst. 2�11

Chassisinstallationdiagram

Figure 2-3 shows the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 chassis being installedonto the wall bracket.

CARRYING/LIFTINGHANDLE

CARRYING/LIFTINGHANDLE

Figure 2-3 Installing the BTS chassis

GSM-209-423Connecting external cables to the enclosure



68P02902W63-O

Connecting external cables to the enclosure

Introduction toconnectingcables

WARNING The Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 must be earthedwith a conductor capable of carrying the full fault current ofthe overcurrent protection device.Equipment earths should not be daisy chained together.The ac input power connections must not be made at themain power source at this time. The power-up procedureis provided at the end of this chapter.Ensure that LIVE and NEUTRAL are correctly connectedat the power source; additional risk to personnel ordamage to the equipment may result in the event of aninternal fault.

The principal connections to be made when installing a Horizonmicro2 orHorizoncompact2 are:

S Earth connections at the following points:

� AC protective earth for the PSM (Power Supply Module), connectedtogether with line and neutral ac power conductors within one cableto the socket supplied (including seal).

� Earth/lightning protection via the wall mounting bracket M8 stud.

S AC power supply to the PSM.

S External antenna connection (if fitted).

S External antenna connections fitted to the booster.

S E1/HDSL link.

NOTE The alarms connector is fitted during commissioning.

Tools required


S Screwdriver set.

S Ratchet with 1/4 inch socket.


S T25 tamperproof bit (supplied).


GSM-209-423 Connecting external cables to the enclosure

20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O Inst. 2�13

Connectingearth straps

WARNING All earth strap connections must be secured between twostar washers on each earth stud.

Supplementary earth

A supplementary earth cable may be connected to the M8 threaded earth studon the wall bracket. This facility is available for additional protection in exposedenvironments.

A factory supplied earth cable is fitted to the wall bracket earth point. At thebottom of the chassis is a M8 threaded earth stud. Once the chassis is installedon the wall bracket, the supplementary earth cable is connected to thesupplementary earth stud on the chassis.

Figure 2-4 shows the location of the supplementary site earth connection to thechassis via the wall bracket.

WALLBRACKET

EARTH

CHASSISEARTH


CHASSIS

Figure 2-4 Supplementary earth connection to chassis via wall bracket

Safety earth

The ac supply (safety) earth is connected via the green/yellow conductor of theac power supply cable to the PSM. The PSM is internally bonded to the chassisby a factory-fitted earth cable.




68P02902W63-O

Connecting theac power cable

WARNING Ensure the ac power supply input has been safelyisolated, so that there is no risk of power being applied tothe cable during this procedure. The source should beisolated and locked, and warning label attached.

To connect the ac power cable:

1. Ensure the gasket is fitted prior to the ac power socket, then insert the acpower socket into the ac power plug of the ac-dc PSM, as indicated inFigure 2-5.

2. Remove the plastic cable clips from the polythene bag provided, thenroute and secure the power cable using four cable clip locations down theside of the cabinet, two cable grips on the inside of the casing and cableclip at central entry point, as indicated in Figure 2-5.


20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O Inst. 2�15

Figure 2-5 shows the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 gasket and plastic clippositions.

AC INPUTCONNECTOR

RX, TXCONNECTORS

E1 LINKCONNECTORS

HDSL LINKCONNECTORS

FOUR CABLE CLIPLOCATIONS

FOR AC POWER CABLE

AC POWER CABLE CLIP FOREXTERNAL ENTRY TO CABINET

TWO AC POWERCABLE GRIPPING

POINTS ON INSIDEOF COVER

GASKET

ALARMS CONNECTOR FOR BOOSTER

(NOT USED)

EARTH (GREEN ANDYELLOW)


SHOWN

(NOT USED)NEUTRAL

(BLUE OR BLACK)

LIVE (BROWN OR RED)LIVE

(BROWN OR RED)

ONHorizonmicro2 ORHorizoncompact2

(ONLY USED ONHORIZONCOMPACT2)

AC POWER PLUG

Figure 2-5 Gasket and plastic clip positions




68P02902W63-O

Connecting theHorizonmicro2antenna cable

To connect a common transmit/receive antenna:

NOTE The following procedure applies if an optional internalantenna is not fitted.The antenna connector has to fit snugly under the solarcover, and for this reason must be a N-type 90° elbow,environmentally sealed to IP55, Huber and Suhner16N-50-3-33-133 IP. It is assumed that pre-terminatedcoaxial cables are to be used for the antenna feeders.

1. Route a coaxial jumper lead from the transmit/receive antenna feederconnector on the antenna junction to the wall bracket.

2. Route the cable through the centre aperture of the conduit terminationbracket up from the bottom. The cable can be alternatively routed downfrom the top of the enclosure, depending on installation and customerrequirement.

3. Connect the N-type (90°) antenna connector to the antenna port on thecentre front of the chassis, as shown in Figure 2-6.

RX,/TXCONNECTOR DUMMY CONNECTORS

Figure 2-6 View of Horizonmicro2 chassis, showing Rx/Tx connector position


20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O Inst. 2�17

Optionalinternal antenna

Figure 2-7 shows a Horizonmicro2 enclosure fitted with an optional internalantenna, secured to the front heatsink. The optional internal antenna has a gainof 8.5 dB and is vertically polarized.

INTERNALANTENNA

Figure 2-7 Optional internal antenna mounted on the Horizonmicro2 chassis




68P02902W63-O

Connecting thebooster cables

NOTE This procedure only applies to the Horizoncompact2 BTS.The Tx and Rx connectors have to fit snugly under thesolar cover, and for this reason must be an N-type 90°elbow, environmentally sealed to IP55, Huber and Suhner16N-50-3-33-133 IP. It is assumed that pre-terminatedcoaxial cables are to be used for the antenna feeders.

To connect the booster cables to the Horizoncompact2 BTS:

1. Route each coaxial jumper lead cable either down from the top of theenclosure, or up from the bottom of the enclosure to the relevantconnector at the front of the unit, as shown in Figure 2-8.

2. Connect each N-type (90°) booster connector to the relevant RF port, asshown in Figure 2-8.

Figure 2-8 shows the Horizoncompact2 cable connectors.

TX1 CABLE CONNECTORMASTER (N type)

DTRX MODULE

AC-DC POWERSUPPLY MODULE

RDIS MODULE

RX CABLE CONNECTOR(N type)

AC INPUTCONNECTOR

NOTE:ENSURE SEALED RIGHTANGLED CONNECTORHUBER & SUHNER PARTNO. 16N-50-3-33-133

TX2 CABLE CONNECTORSLAVE (N type)

Figure 2-8 View of Horizoncompact2 chassis, showing cable connectors


20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O Inst. 2�19

Connecting theE1/HDSL link


J15 J16J14 J17 J13

DINO (E1/HDSL)RHINO (E1/HDSL)

J12J11

INTERNALSLAVE

INTERNALMASTER

HDSL OPTIONA B

TXRX

TXRX

PORT PIN1 & 6

2 & 73 & 84 & 9

PORT PINDINO LABEL

ALARMHDSL OPTION

INTERNAL SLAVE


A A B B

RHINO LABEL



ALARM

J13 J12

J3 (MMI)

J13 J12J17J16J15J14

J11

(ACTIVE ONHORIZONCOMPACT2

ONLY)

J12J13

Figure 2-9 Location of customer interface connectors

NOTE It is assumed that cables to be used for the E1/HDSL linksare pre-terminated with the appropriate connector.

CAUTION Inspect the E1 connectors carefully for signs of damagebefore making connections to the BTS. A damagedconnector will result in the BTS going out of service or onecarrier being reported as DRI inhibited.For T43 connectors, inspect both the plugs on the BTSand the sockets on the mating cable. Attach the socketgently, keeping it as straight as possible to the plug.For D-type connectors, use a connector shell withappropriate cable restraints.




68P02902W63-O

DINO module connections

Table 2-3 lists the DINO (E1) module connections.

Table 2-3 DINO (E1) module interconnections

Pin no. Function Pin no. Function

J11-1 CHANNEL 1 Tx1+ J11-6 CHANNEL 1 Tx1�

J11-2 CHANNEL 1 Rx1+ J11-7 CHANNEL 1 Rx1�

J11-3 CHANNEL 2 Tx2+ J11-8 CHANNEL 2 Tx2�

J11-4 CHANNEL 2 Rx2+ J11-9 CHANNEL 2 Rx2�

J12-1 HDSL_EXT_1A+ J12-3 HDSL_EXT_1A�

J12-5 HDSL_EXT_1B+ J12-7 HDSL_EXT_1B�



NOTE The J12 and J13 RJ45 connector pinouts on the DINO arenon standard. If a D-type to RJ45 adapter cable is used toconnect an external modem, the cable must be configuredso that the D-type pins 4, 9, 1, 6 connect to RJ45 pins 3,1, 7, 5 respectively.

RHINO module connections

Table 2-4 lists the RHINO module connections.

Table 2-4 RHINO module connections

Pin no. Function Pin no. Function





J14Centre

CHANNEL 1 Tx1+ J14Shield

CHANNEL 1 Tx1�(ac coupled to earth)

J15Centre

CHANNEL 1 Rx1+ J15Shield

CHANNEL 1 Rx1�(earth)

J16Centre

CHANNEL 2 Tx2+ J16Shield

CHANNEL 2 Tx2�(ac coupled to earth)

J17Centre

CHANNEL 2 Rx2+ J17Shield

CHANNEL 2 Rx2�(earth)

NOTE The J12 and J13 RJ45 connector pinouts on the RHINOare non standard. If a D-type to RJ45 adapter cable isused to connect an external modem, the cable must beconfigured so that the D-type pins 4, 9, 1, 6 connect toRJ45 pins 3, 1, 7, 5 respectively.


20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O Inst. 2�21

E1/HDSL link and alarms connection procedureTo connect the E1/HDSL link(s) and alarms cable:

1. Unscrew the sealant cover (four M5 screws) of the customer interfaceclamp.

2. Remove the strain relief clamp (seven M3 screws).

3. Feed the cables through the strain relief clamp and main bracket.

4. Attach the connectors as indicated by the following table:

If ... Then ...

T43connectors

Insert the T43 coaxial connectors into the appropriatesockets (J14, J15, J16, J17) on the RHINO module.

D-typeconnection

Insert the 9 pin D-type connector into the socket J11 onthe DINO module.

HDSLconnection

Insert the HDSL connector(s) into the appropriate socket(J12 and/or J13) on the RHINO or DINO (E1) module.

Alarms cableconnection

The alarms connector is not attached to the BTS untilcommissioning. Leave sufficient cable slack to make theconnection to the appropriate socket.

Fitting the customer interface clampTo fit the customer interface clamp:

1. Fit the main bracket (see Figure 2-10) to the chassis casing (four M5screws) and tighten the screws to the correct torque.

CAUTION Ensure the cable connectors are firmly in place and thatthe cables are clamped without affecting the connectors.

2. Tighten the strain relief clamp (seven M3 screws) to seal the clamp ontothe cables.

3. Fit the sealant cover (four M5 screws) and tighten the screws to thecorrect torque.

STRAINRELIEFCLAMP

MAIN BRACKET (FITTO CHASSIS CASING)

SEALANTCOVER

EXTERNALCABLES IN

CABLES TO CHASSISCONNECTORS

CUSTOMERINTERFACE CLAMP

UNDERSIDE VIEW

Figure 2-10 Customer interface clamp used to protect E1/HDSL and alarmconnectors

GSM-209-423Installing the BTS solar cover



68P02902W63-O

Installing the BTS solar cover

Introduction toinstalling theBTS solar cover

This procedure provides instructions for installing the solar cover onto thechassis.

CAUTION Screws should be tightened to the specified torque for thescrew size using a torque wrench. The torque values aregiven at the start of this chapter.

Tools andequipment


S Ratchet, with 1/4 inch socket to fit a tamperproof T25 tool bit.

S Torque wrench.

This procedure requires the following items from the installation kit, carton B:

S Solar cover.

S Blank label push-in clip.

GSM-209-423 Installing the BTS solar cover

20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O Inst. 2�23

Fitting the solarcover

To fit the solar cover to the chassis:

1. Ensure that the two M5 tamperproof screws on the lower front of thechassis have been released such that the end of the screws are flush withthe top of the bottom securing lugs.

2. Position the solar cover over the chassis.

3. Lift the solar cover slightly above the top of the chassis, and align with thesides of the rear cover.

4. Slightly angle the top of the solar cover, push towards the chassis anddownwards, until it is positioned on the chassis top locating lugs.

5. Ensure that the solar cover is located on the bottom securing lugs, and isflush with the back cover.

6. Secure the solar cover to the chassis by tightening the two M5tamperproof screws evenly to the correct torque.

Figure 2-11 shows the solar cover being mounted onto the chassis.

BLANK LABEL OR CUSTOMEROPTION PUSH-IN CLIP ig.056.rh

Figure 2-11 Installing the solar cover

GSM-209-423Battery/cover installation



68P02902W63-O

Battery/cover installation

Installing thebattery andcover

Perform the following procedure to install the battery and cover onto thechassis:

1. Using a clean, dry cloth, wipe the underside of the chassis to remove anyexcess moisture, and wipe any excess moisture from the gasket sealaround the underside of the chassis.

2. Unpack the battery pack from its protective wrapping and inspect for anydamage. See Figure 2-12 for details of the battery and its mountingposition on the chassis.

3. Insert the supplied 20 A blade fuse into holder on the top of battery pack.Prior to insertion, check integrity of fuse by visual inspection.

4. Ensure that the two pin connector is positioned at the left end of thechassis and position the battery pack on the underside of the chassis.Ensure interface cables are routed out of cable exit channel on thebattery/cover.

5. Secure in place using the two M5 tamperproof screws and apply correcttorque.

BATTERY/COVER

CABLE EXITCHANNEL

BLADE FUSE

Figure 2-12 Battery and location

GSM-209-423 Installing the booster chassis

20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O Inst. 2�25

Installing the booster chassis

Introduction toinstallingbooster chassis

This procedure provides instructions for installing the Horizoncompact2 boosterchassis onto the wall bracket.

CAUTION The chassis should not be removed from the protectivebarrier bag until the equipment is ready to be installed andpowered up.If the protective barrier bag has been removed and theunit cannot be immediately installed and powered up, thechassis should be stored in a weather protectedenvironment.

Tools required


S Screwdriver set.

S Ratchet, with 1/4 in drive socket to fit 6 mm hex tool bit.

S Torque wrench.

CAUTION Bolts should be tightened to the specified torque using atorque wrench. The torque values are provided at the startof this chapter.

GSM-209-423Installing the booster chassis



68P02902W63-O

Antennacabling

There are two options for antenna cabling to the Horizoncompact2 booster unit,depending on site installation layout. If the antenna cables are to exit from thetop of the Horizoncompact2 booster unit, then the wall bracket RF cables mustbe fitted before the Horizoncompact2 booster is lifted onto the wall bracket.

1. Secure the bulkhead connectors to the wall bracket on the upper returnflange.

2. Secure cables to the wall bracket with the cable ties supplied.

Figure 2-13 shows the antenna cabling details.

TIE WRAPS

ANTENNA CABLES

UPPER RETURNFLANGE

ANTENNA CABLES

TIE WRAPS

GSM900 VERSION

DCS1800 VERSION

UPPER RETURNFLANGE

Figure 2-13 Securing antenna cables (Horizoncompact2 booster)

GSM-209-423 Installing the booster chassis

20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O Inst. 2�27


The preferred method of access for Horizoncompact2 booster equipment fittedabove ground/floor level is via a hydraulic lift. Scaffolding or ladders can beused if appropriate, or if a hydraulic lift is not available.

NOTE Exercise great care when using hydraulic lifting gear andobserve all instruction and safety precautions.If the installation is being carried out in a public area, asuitable area around the site of the installation must becordoned off to prevent members of the public accessingthe site.If possible, a third member of the installation team shouldbe stationed at the site to ensure that the designated sitearea is not accessed by members of the public.


WARNING An equipped Horizonmicro2 GSM900 booster chassis(without battery or cover) weighs 21 kg; fully fitted weightcan be 28 kg. The DCS1800 version weighs 19 kg(without battery or cover) or 24 kg fully equipped.Handle with extreme care and observe normal handlingprecautions when lifting and carrying.

1. Move the Horizoncompact2 booster chassis to the cage of the hydrauliclift.


3. Carefully manoeuvre the cage of the hydraulic lift until it is adjacent to theinstallation point on the wall, so that the Horizoncompact2 booster chassisis as close as possible to the wall bracket.

GSM-209-423Installing the booster chassis



68P02902W63-O

Installing thechassis ontothe wall bracket

To install the Horizoncompact2 booster chassis (refer to Figure 2-14):

1. Using the handles either side of the booster chassis, align and locate thebracket fixing positions, then place the booster securely in the bracket.

2. Remove the four M8 screws securing each carrying/lifting handle to thesides of the chassis. Remove both handles and store for future use.

3. Using the four M8 bolts and washers removed from the handles, securethe booster to the mounting bracket.

M8 BOLTS AND WASHERS

CARRYING/LIFTINGHANDLES

M8 BOLTS ANDWASHERS

M8 BOLTS AND WASHERS(SEE NOTE)

GSM900 VERSION

DCS1800 VERSION



Figure 2-14 Installing the booster chassis

GSM-209-423 Connecting external cables to the booster

20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O Inst. 2�29

Connecting external cables to the booster

Introduction toconnectingbooster externalcables

WARNING The Horizoncompact2 booster must be earthed with aconductor capable of carrying the full fault current of theovercurrent protection device.Equipment earths should not be daisy chained together.The ac input power connections must not be made at themain power source at this time. The power-up procedureis provided at the end of this chapter.Ensure that LIVE and NEUTRAL are correctly connectedat the power source; additional risk to personnel ordamage to the equipment may result in the event of aninternal fault.

The principal connections to be made when installing an Horizoncompact2booster are:

S Earth connections at the following points:

� The protective earth for the BPSM (Booster Power Supply Module),connected together with line and neutral ac power conductors withinone cable to the socket supplied (including seal).

� Earth/lightning protection via the wall mounting bracket M8 stud.

S AC power supply to the BPSM.

NOTE The alarms connector is fitted during commissioning.

Tools required


S Screwdriver set.

S Ratchet with 1/4 inch socket.




GSM-209-423Connecting external cables to the booster



68P02902W63-O

Connectingearth straps

WARNING All earth strap connections must be secured between twostar washers on each earth stud.

Safety earth

The ac supply supply (safety) earth is connected via the green/yellow conductorof the ac power supply cable to the PSM. The PSM is internally bonded to thechassis by a factory-fitted earth cable.

Supplementary earth

A supplementary earth cable may be connected to the M8 threaded earth studon the wall bracket. This facility is available for additional protection in exposedenvironments.

A factory-supplied supplementary earth cable is fitted to the wall bracket studand this is connected to the chassis earth stud, once the chassis is installed onthe wall bracket.


20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O Inst. 2�31

Supplementaryearthconnectiondiagram

Figure 2-15 shows the location of the supplementary earth connection to thebooster chassis via the wall bracket.

BOOSTEREARTH

WALL BRACKETEARTH

GSM900 VERSION

DCS1800 VERSION

WALL BRACKETEARTH

BOOSTEREARTH

Figure 2-15 Supplementary earth connection to booster via wall bracket




68P02902W63-O

Connecting theRx, Tx andantenna cables

To connect the antenna cables:

NOTE It is assumed that pre-terminated coaxial cables are to beused for the antenna feeders.The Rx is duplexed on antenna 1 (ANT1) with Tx1.There are two options for antenna cabling to the boosterunit. If the antenna cables require exiting from the top ofthe booster, then the antenna cable must be secured tothe wall bracket first (see Installing booster chassis).

If... Then...

Wall bracket antennas areto be used

Carry out steps 1 and 3.

Antenna cables are to beused entering the bottomof the unit

Carry out steps 2 and 3.

1. Route ANT 1 and ANT 2 in the positions as shown in Figure 2-16.

2. The antennas should be terminated and connected to the relevant ANT1and ANT2 port on the Horizoncompact2 booster as shown in Figure 2-16(not using the wall bracket antenna cables).

NOTE In this case only straight 50 ohm N-type plug connectorsare to be terminated and sealed for the outdoorenvironment.

3. Route each of the three coaxial jumper lead cables (Rx, Tx1 and Tx2),extending from the top of the Horizoncompact2 BTS to the relevant N-typeconnector port on the booster, as shown in Figure 2-16 (GSM900 version)or Figure 2-17 (DCS1800 version) and connect up.


20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O Inst. 2�33

GSM900 antenna configurations

RXCABLE

INDICATORTX1MASTERCABLE

ANT1WALL BRACKET

ANTENNA CABLE EARTHCONNECTION

INDICATOR

ANT2WALL BRACKET

CABLE

TX2SLAVECABLE

ANT1ANTENNA CABLE EARTH

CONNECTION

ANT2ANTENNA

CABLE

TX2SLAVECABLE

RXCABLETX1

MASTERCABLE

Figure 2-16 Rx, Tx and antenna connections (two GSM900 configurations)




68P02902W63-O

DCS1800 antenna configurations

RXCABLE

INDICATOR

ANT1WALL BRACKET

ANTENNA CABLE

EARTHCONNECTION

TX2SLAVECABLE

ANT2WALL BRACKET

CABLE

TX1MASTERCABLE

RXCABLE

TX2SLAVECABLE

INDICATOR

EARTHCONNECTION

ANT1ANTENNA

CABLE

ANT2ANTENNA

CABLE

TX1MASTERCABLE

Figure 2-17 Rx, Tx and antenna connections (two DCS1800 configurations)


20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O Inst. 2�35

Connecting theac power cable

WARNING Ensure the mains ac power supply input has been safelyisolated, so that there is no risk of power being applied tothe cable during this procedure. The source should beisolated and locked, and warning label attached.

To connect the ac power cable, first ensure the gasket is fitted prior to the acpower socket then insert the ac power connector into the ac power plug on theunderside of the booster, as indicated in Figure 2-18.

(NOT USED)

EARTH (GREEN ANDYELLOW)


SHOWN

AC POWER SOCKET

(NOT USED)NEUTRAL

(BLUE OR BLACK)

LIVE (BROWN OR RED)

LIVE (BROWN OR RED) Horizoncompact2 BOOSTER AC

POWER PLUG

GASKET

GASKET

GSM900 VERSION

DCS1800 VERSION

Figure 2-18 Fitting the ac plug




68P02902W63-O

Setting up theclamp

To connect the ac power and alarms cable to the cable clamp, refer toFigure 2-19 and proceed as follows:

1. Loosen the clamp screws and remove the bottom part.

2. On the GSM900 booster, feed the alarms cable through the first position inthe clamp and the ac cable through the third position in the clamp.

On the DCS1800 booster, feed the ac cable through the first position inthe clamp and the alarms cable through the third position in the clamp.

3. Refit the bottom main clamp to the chassis casing and tighten the clampscrews to secure the cables in position.

AC POWER CABLE

ALARMS CABLE

CABLE CLAMP

AC POWER CABLE

ALARMS CABLE

CABLE CLAMP

GSM900VERSION

DCS1800VERSION

Figure 2-19 Clamping the ac power and alarms cables


20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O Inst. 2�37

Connecting thealarms cable

The alarms connector, with cable attached, is not fitted during installation.Instead, an alarms indicator is temporarily fitted to the Horizoncompact2 boosterto provide visual indication of power to the unit.

NOTE The alarms connector should not be fitted untilcommissioning (see Chapter 4 Commissioning of thiscategory).

Fitting thesecurity bracket

The security bracket is not fitted during installation, unless the commissioning isto be carried out on another day.

NOTE The security bracket should not normally be fitted untilcommissioning (see Chapter 4 Commissioning of thiscategory).The Horizoncompact2 booster solar cover cannot beattached to the booster without the security bracket beingfitted.

To fit the security bracket, refer to Figure 2-20 and Figure 2-21 and proceed asfollows:

1. Remove the indicator and store in a safe location for use duringcommissioning.

2. Fit the alarms connector to the Horizoncompact2 booster for corrosionprotection.

3. Release the two M8 bolts secured to the booster backplate.

4. Slide the security plate up into position and refit the two M8 security boltsto the recommended torque.

5. Insert in turn an M8 x 16 screw at each edge fixing position of the securitybracket, then insert the blade of a screwdriver through the outer securitybracket hole in order to reach the screw head inside, as shown inFigure 2-20 (GSM900 version) or Figure 2-21 (DCS1800 version). Finally,tighten the screws to secure the bracket.




68P02902W63-O

GSM900 security bracket attachment

Figure 2-20 illustrates a GSM900 security bracket attachment to a booster unit.

ALARMSCONNECTOR

INDICATOR

SCREW POSITIONS(M8 x 16)

SCREW POSITION(M8 x 16)

SCREWDRIVER

SECURITYBRACKET

KEY HOLE

BACKPLATE

Figure 2-20 GSM900 security bracket attachment to booster unit


20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O Inst. 2�39

DCS1800 security bracket attachment

Figure 2-21 illustrates a DCS1800 security bracket attachment to a booster unit.

ALARMSCONNECTOR

BACKPLATE SCREW POSITIONS(M8 x 16)

SECURITYBRACKET

KEY HOLE

SCREWDRIVER


INDICATOR

Figure 2-21 DCS1800 security bracket attachment to booster unit

GSM-209-423Installing the booster solar cover



68P02902W63-O

Installing the booster solar cover

Introduction toinstalling thebooster solarcover

The booster solar cover is not fitted during installation, unless commissioning isto be carried out on another day.

CAUTION Screws should be tightened to the specified torque for thescrew size using a torque wrench. The torque values aregiven in Overview of installation procedures at the startof this chapter.

This procedure provides instructions for installing the solar cover onto thechassis.

Tools andequipmentrequired


S Ratchet, with 1/4 inch socket to fit tamperproof T25 tool bit.

S Torque wrench.

This procedure requires the following items from the installation kit, carton C:

S Horizoncompact2 booster solar cover.

GSM-209-423 Installing the booster solar cover

20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O Inst. 2�41

Fitting thebooster solarcover

When commissioning is carried out on another day, the solar cover must befitted at the end of installation. In order to fit the Horizoncompact2 booster solarcover to the chassis:

1. Ensure that the two M5 tamperproof screws on the lower front coverbrackets of the booster are released to fit the security bracket key holeslot, as shown in Figure 2-20 or Figure 2-21.

2. Place solar cover onto the booster mounting bolts, by tilting lower coverand pushing into key hole position, then push forward to secure.

3. Secure the cover by tightening the M5 security screws evenly to thespecified torque.

Figure 2-22 shows the booster solar cover being mounted onto the chassis.

KEY HOLEM5SCREW

SOLARCOVER

LOCATING LUG

RF CABLETO ANTENNA 2

ig.059.rh


Figure 2-22 Installing the booster solar cover (GSM900 version shown)

GSM-209-423Installing the booster solar cover



68P02902W63-O

20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O i

Chapter 3

BTS expansion

GSM-209-423

20th Sep 02ii


68P02902W63-O

GSM-209-423

20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O iii

Chapter 3BTS expansion i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction to the BTS expansion procedure Inst. 3�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About the procedure Inst. 3�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software requirements Inst. 3�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Master/slave establishment Inst. 3�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration of a BTS site Inst. 3�2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the BTSs Inst. 3�2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



GSM-209-423

20th Sep 02iv


68P02902W63-O

GSM-209-423

20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O v

GSM-209-423 Introduction to the BTS expansion procedure

20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O Inst. 3�1

Introduction to the BTS expansion procedure

About theprocedure

This procedure provides instructions for expansion of the base transceiverstation (BTS) site. The master BTS can be connected to either one slave BTS toprovide a four carrier BTS site, or to two slave BTSs to provide six carriers.

WARNING To minimize RF exposure from the antenna, power to thetransceivers must be turned OFF while connections aremade to the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2.Potentially lethal voltages, up to 240 V ac exist within theHorizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 enclosures when theac supply isolator switch is ON and/or the battery isconnected.Laser radiation from fibre optic cables can cause eyedamage within the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2enclosures. If fitted, ensure that all power is turned OFFand the battery pack is removed.


GSR5 or higher software must be loaded in both the master and slave BTSunits of an expanded Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 configuration in orderfor the master/slave relationships to be established.

Master/slaveestablishment

The master downloads database information from the BSC and uses theCABINET (CAB) data to determine which CABs the user has defined to bepresent. The id of the CAB is related directly to the physical port the slaveshould be connected to (for example, CAB 1 0 0 is connected to fibre optic port1 of the master), so from this data the master knows where it expects to haveslaves connected.

During the GSR5 boot process the slave BTS phase locks over the fibre opticcable and initiates contact with the master BTS. A signalling connection isestablished between master and slave, after which the required code objectsare downloaded to the slave. The devices at the slave are then brought intoservice.

GSM-209-423Introduction to the BTS expansion procedure



68P02902W63-O

Configurationof a BTS site

Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 expansion installation is subject to thefollowing rules:

S The expansion BTS site must have one BTS configured as the master.The master BTS is connected to the BSC using an E1 link attached to theNIU. Additional BTSs at the BTS site are connected as slaves through thefibre optic link to the slave ports.

NOTE The instruction label within the side panel (next to the fibreoptic ports), states that both sets of fibre optic ports act asa master on the master BTS whilst only the bottom set offibre optic ports is to be used on a slave BTS.

S The maximum fibre length between the master BTS and a slave BTS is 1 km (lengths of 700 m to 800 m are not permitted). This limitation isrequired to allow synchronous handovers between the cells at the site.


Connecting theBTSs

In order to cover most of the possibilities, it is assumed that a six carrier BTSsite has been selected and the BTSs are positioned at the correct locations.Connections between the booster and the BTS (whether GSM900 or DCS1800)have been described in the previous chapter and are not described in thissection.

GSM900 BTSs can be mixed with DCS1800 BTSs.

WARNING The system configuration must be star connected from themaster to the two slaves, as in Figure 3-1. Daisy chaining,that is master-slave-slave, is not permitted.

GSM-209-423 Introduction to the BTS expansion procedure

20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O Inst. 3�3

Horizonmicro2 six carrier BTS

Figure 3-1 illustrates a six carrier Horizonmicro2 BTS site, where the three unitsare linked by fibre optic cables.

SLAVE BTS

SLAVE BTS

MASTER BTS

Figure 3-1 Six carrier Horizonmicro2 BTS site

GSM-209-423Introduction to the BTS expansion procedure



68P02902W63-O

Horizoncompact2 six carrier BTS

Figure 3-2 illustrates a six carrier Horizoncompact2 BTS site, where the threeunits are linked by fibre optic cables.

MASTER BTS

FIBREOPTICLINKS

(GSM900 OR DCS1800)

SLAVE BTS(GSM900 OR DCS1800)

BOOSTER

BOOSTER

BOOSTER

SLAVE BTS(GSM900 OR DCS1800)

Figure 3-2 Six carrier Horizoncompact2 BTS site with boosters

GSM-209-423 Installing the expansion fibre optic cabling

20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O Inst. 3�5

Installing the expansion fibre optic cabling



S Ratchet, with 1/4 inch socket to fit a tamperproof T25 tool bit.

S Torque wrench.


The preferred method of access for Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2equipment fitted above ground/floor level is via a hydraulic lift. Scaffolding orladders can be used if appropriate or if a hydraulic lift is not available.

NOTE Exercise great care when utilizing hydraulic lifting gearand observe all instruction and safety precautions.If the installation is being carried out in a public area, asuitable area around the site of the installation must becordoned off to prevent members of the public accessingthe site.If possible, a third member of the installation team shouldbe stationed at the site to ensure that the designated sitearea is not accessed by members of the public.



2. Carefully manoeuvre the cage of the hydraulic lift until it is adjacent to theHorizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 chassis.

GSM-209-423Installing the expansion fibre optic cabling



68P02902W63-O

Removing thefront solarcovers


If the front solar covers are fitted then:

1. Release the two M5 tamperproof screws that clamp the solar cover to thechassis from the bottom of the solar cover.

2. Pull the bottom of the solar cover away from the chassis and upwards,until it is free from the chassis locating lugs.

CAUTION Avoid dropping or placing anything on top of the solarcover, as it is susceptible to damage.

3. Remove the solar cover and put in a safe place where it will not bedamaged.

Figure 3-3 shows the removal of the BTS solar cover from the chassis.

Figure 3-3 Removing the BTS solar cover

GSM-209-423 Installing the expansion fibre optic cabling

20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O Inst. 3�7

Removing theside and innercovers

To remove the BTS side cover and inner cover:

WARNING Power to the transceivers must be turned OFF, whileconnections are made to the Horizonmicro2 orHorizoncompact2. This is a precaution to minimize RFexposure from the antenna.Potentially lethal voltages, up to 240 V ac exist within theHorizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 enclosures when theac supply isolator switch is ON and/or the battery isconnected.Laser radiation from fibre optic cables can cause eyedamage within the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2enclosures. If fitted, ensure that all power is turned OFFand the battery pack is removed.

1. Remove the pin from the outer plastic side cover and then push back thecover to remove. Retain the pin for securing the expansion cover.

2. Remove the four M5 screws securing the inner metal cover and thenremove the cover.

GSM-209-423Connecting the fibre optic cables



68P02902W63-O

Connecting the fibre optic cables

Introduction

The expansion casting is supplied with fibre connectors already installed. Thefollowing text describes the procedure for installing the casting.

Figure 3-4 shows the expansion casting with fibre connectors already installed.

PORT 2

PORT 1

Tx1

Rx1

Rx2

Tx2

Figure 3-4 Expansion casting with fibre optic connectors installed

GSM-209-423 Connecting the fibre optic cables

20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O Inst. 3�9

Connecting thefibre optic linksto the masterBTS

Proceed as follows to install the expansion casting and connect the fibre opticlinks (see also Figure 3-4 and Figure 3-5) :


1. Locate the four optical fibre plugs on the expansion casting into the foursockets on the master BTS. The sockets have a plastic guide plate toensure correct alignment. Secure the expansion casting to the BTS withfour screws and tighten to 3.4 Nm torque.

NOTE On early versions, remove the fibre protection caps beforeconnection.The plastic guide fitted in the BTS(s) to ensure correctalignment of the fibre connectors may not be present �take care to fit the connectors correctly.

2. Connect the fibre optic link cable to the first slave BTS to port 1 on themaster BTS. The connector is a bayonet type. Insert the plug into thesocket and turn to lock into position.

3. Connect the fibre optic link cable to the second slave BTS (if fitted) to port2 on the master BTS.

4. Place the expansion cover bottom locating lugs in the fixing positions andthen push the unit forward to its fixing position. Secure the expansioncover to the BTS chassis with the retaining pin.




68P02902W63-O

Connecting thefibre optic linksto the slave BTS

1. Locate the four optical fibre plugs on the expansion casting into the foursockets on the slave BTS(s). The sockets have a plastic guide plate toensure correct alignment. Secure expansion casting to the BTS with fourscrews and tighten to 3.4 Nm torque.

CAUTION Do not allow the expansion casting to hang from the fibreoptic cable.

2. Connect the fibre optic link cable to the master BTS to port 1 on the slaveBTS.


Figure 3-5 shows the master and slave BTS interconnections.

FIBREOPTICLINKS

PORT 1PORT 2

MASTER BTS

2nd SLAVE BTS

1st SLAVE BTS

FIBRE OPTICCONNECTIONS

PORT 1

PORT 1

Figure 3-5 Master and slave BTS fibre optic interconnections

GSM-209-423 Connecting the fibre optic cables

20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O Inst. 3�11

Refitting theBTS solarcovers

WARNING Power to the transceivers must be turned OFF, whileconnections are made to the Horizonmicro2 orHorizoncompact2. This is a precaution to minimize RFexposure from the antenna.Potentially lethal voltages of up to 240 V ac exist withinthe Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 enclosures whenthe ac supply isolator switch is ON and/or the battery isconnected.Laser radiation from fibre optic cables can cause eyedamage within the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2enclosures. If fitted, ensure that all power is turned OFFand the battery pack is removed.

To refit each solar cover:

1. Refit the solar cover onto the top chassis locating lugs.

2. Ensure the solar cover attaches onto the bottom securing lugs.

3. Tighten the two M5 tamperproof screws to the bottom of the solar cover,applying the correct torque.

Figure 3-6 shows the solar cover being refitted.

ig.056.rh

Figure 3-6 Refitting the solar cover




68P02902W63-O

20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O i

Chapter 4

Commissioning

GSM-209-423

20th Sep 02ii


68P02902W63-O

GSM-209-423

20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O iii

Chapter 4Commissioning i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Commissioning Inst. 4�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Commissioning overview Inst. 4�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .




GSM-209-423

20th Sep 02iv


68P02902W63-O

GSM-209-423 Commissioning

20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O Inst. 4�1

Commissioning

Commissioningoverview

This chapter provides information required for the commissioning of aHorizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 BTS.

Before starting commissioning, the site should be prepared and the equipmentinstalled as described in this service manual and the site specificdocumentation.

NOTE If the E1 link is not active when the Horizonmicro2 orHorizoncompact2 is commissioned it will not be possible todownload code directly from the BSC.

Commissioning a Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 consists of the sectionslisted in Table 4-1.

Table 4-1 Commissioning overview

Section Description

Test equipment & test leads. Describes the equipment required to performcommissioning.

Pre-power up checks. Steps to perform before powering up thesystem.

Powering up the equipment. Describes the correct power up sequence.

Battery backup check. Stipulates how, and under what conditions, abattery check can be performed.

NOTE After power up, automatic OMC-R procedures are used forcode download and configuration. Thus there is norequirement for intervention after power up.Equipment does not include a battery charger.

GSM-209-423Pre power up checks



68P02902W63-O

Pre power up checks

Introduction

WARNING Before powering up the equipment, the power systemchecks provided in this section must be performed.Only insulated tools should be used when working on theHorizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 power system.

This section contains procedures for testing the power system prior to applyingpower to a Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 enclosure.

CAUTION This equipment contains CMOS devices and is vulnerableto static discharge. Although the damage may not beimmediately apparent, CMOS devices may be damaged inthe long term due to mishandling causing barrierbreakdown.

Earth continuitychecks

Before proceeding with the earth continuity checks, ensure the system mainearth to the site connections are in place and secure.

Check that the resistance of the test equipment leads is less than 0.05 Ohms.

GSM-209-423 Pre power up checks

20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O Inst. 4�3

Inspecting thesystem visually

Inspect the installation for damage in accordance with BS 7671 (16th Edition<Section 711, 712 and 713>) or the IEC Wiring regulations equivalent.

WARNING If damage is discovered during the visual inspection, donot proceed with commissioning until the damage hasbeen inspected and rectified by the manufacturers or theirrepresentatives.

Equipment interior and exterior

Examine the exterior of the enclosure for structural, paint or mechanical damageand report any damage to Motorola for repair.

Power system

Visually examine the power system for mechanical damage and report anydamage to Motorola for repair.

To perform a visual inspection of the power systems:

WARNING Potential lethal voltages up to 240 V ac, and high energysources are present within the BTS when the ac supplyisolator switch is set to the ON position and/or the batteryis connected.Ensure the main ac power isolator is in the OFF positionbefore proceeding.

1. Check system earth connections for tightness and cable/strap damage.

2. Check the protective earth to the BTS PSM and booster.

GSM-209-423Powering up the BTS and booster



68P02902W63-O

Powering up the BTS and booster

Preparation forpowering up theequipment

This section provides the procedure to be followed when initially powering up aHorizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 BTS enclosure and Horizoncompact2booster.

WARNING Before powering up the equipment, the power systemchecks provided in Pre power up checks must beperformed.Only insulated tools should be used when working on thepower system.

CAUTION When the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 has beenpowered up, it must not be powered down until thecomplete software download has finished. This is becausepowering down of the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2could interfere with automatic software loading whichtakes place at commissioning. Such interference couldcause an equipment software failure, requiring specialistrepair procedures.

GSM-209-423 Powering up the BTS and booster

20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O Inst. 4�5

Powering up theequipment

WARNING The Horizonmicro2 enclosure, the Horizoncompact2enclosure and the Horizoncompact2 booster do not haveindividual ac power switches and are therefore live whenthe ac power isolator switch is turned on.

Horizonmicro2 power up procedure1. Ensure that the 20 A blade fuse on the battery has been visually

inspected, and correctly inserted.

2. Operate the ac power isolator on the master BTS to switch on the acsupply to the Horizonmicro2 PSM.

3. Repeat the procedure to power up the slave BTS(s), if fitted.

4. Contact the OMC-R to verify that communication has been establishedwith the site.

Horizoncompact2 power up procedure

1. Ensure that the 20 A blade fuse on the battery has been visuallyinspected, and correctly inserted.

2. Operate the ac power isolator on the master BTS to switch on the acsupply to the Horizoncompact2 PSM.

3. Repeat the procedure to power up the slave BTS(s), if fitted.

4. Starting with the master BTS, then the slave BTS(s), remove thebooster(s) solar cover(s) (see Chapter 2), ensuring that the indicator(s)is/are fitted. See Figure 4-1 (GSM900 version) or Figure 4-2 (DCS1800version). Operate the ac power isolator to switch on the ac supply to thebooster(s).

NOTE An alarm indicator is temporarily fitted to the booster toprovide a visual indication of power to the unit.

If the indicator is illuminated, follow steps 5 to 9 (see also Warning andCaution in the previous section).

If the indicator is not illuminated, check the mains cable and connectors. Ifthe problem persists then the booster unit is faulty and needs to bereplaced.

Notify the OMC-R and do not try to commission the Horizoncompact2.Close down the site until a new Horizoncompact2 booster is delivered.

WARNING Ensure the ac supply input has been safely isolated, sothat there is no risk of power being applied to the cableduring this procedure. The source should be isolated andlocked and a warning label attached.

CAUTION The other end of the alarms cable must be fitted to thecustomer interface sealing assembly and plugged in to theHorizoncompact2 (see Figure 2-10 in Chapter 2 of thiscategory).




68P02902W63-O

5. Disconnect the alarms indicator and fit the alarms connector to theHorizoncompact2 booster.

NOTE Ensure the other end of the alarms cable is connected tothe Horizoncompact2 (see Chapter 2 of this category).

6. Release the two M8 bolts secured to the booster backplate. Slide thesecurity plate up into position, refit the two M8 security bolts and tighten tothe recommended torque.

7. Insert in turn an M8 x 16 screw at each edge fixing position of the securitybracket, then insert the blade of a screwdriver through the outer securitybracket hole to reach the screw head inside, as shown in Figure 4-1(GSM900 version) or Figure 4-2 (DCS1800 version). Finally, tighten thescrews to secure the bracket.

8. Refit the booster solar cover(s) (see Chapter 2 of this category).

9. Contact the OMC-R to verify that communication has been establishedwith the site.

GSM-209-423 Powering up the BTS and booster

20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O Inst. 4�7

GSM900booster view

Figure 4-1 are external views of the Horizoncompact2 GSM900 booster unitshowing the alarms connection.

ALARMS CONNECTOR

INDICATOR

SCREW POSITIONS (M8 x 16)


SCREWDRIVER

SECURITYBRACKET

KEY HOLE

BACKPLATE

Figure 4-1 Horizoncompact2 GSM900 booster unit showing the alarmsconnection




68P02902W63-O

DCS1800booster view

Figure 4-2 are external views of the Horizoncompact2 DCS1800 booster unitshowing the alarms connection.

ALARMS CONNECTOR

BACKPLATE SCREW POSITIONS (M8 x 16)

SECURITYBRACKET

KEY HOLE

SCREWDRIVER


INDICATOR

Figure 4-2 Horizoncompact2 DCS1800 booster unit showing the alarmsconnection

GSM-209-423 Battery check

20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O Inst. 4�9

Battery check

Introduction tothe batterycheck

The objective of the battery check is to verify the serviceability of the battery inthe event of an ac supply failure.

NOTE Before performing the battery test it is imperative that thebattery is fully charged.The battery takes a minimum of 12 hours to fully charge.The battery is of the sealed type and never needs anymaintenance.Expected life of the battery is approximately five years.Equipment does not include a battery charger.

CAUTION The battery check must NOT be performed until thecomplete software download is finished. This is becausethe battery is unlikely to be fully charged, and poweringdown of the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 couldpossibly interfere with automatic software loading. Suchinterference could create an equipment software failurerequiring specialist repair procedures.

Battery test

To test the battery proceed as follows:

S Ensure that all transceiver channels are unlocked and busy by asking theOMC-R to check the state of the site.

S Switch off the ac supply at the ac power isolator.

NOTE The Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 enclosures donot have an ac power isolator switch.

S Confirm that the OMC-R receives an ac fail alarm.

S Confirm with the OMC-R that the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 stilloperates correctly on battery power.

S Switch on the ac supply at the ac power isolator switch.

CAUTION Leaving power off for more than five minutes could resultin the OMC-R receiving a Low Voltage DisconnectImminent alarm, and then the Horizonmicro2 orHorizoncompact2 unit may shut down, causing loss ofservice.

S Confirm that the OMC-R receives an alarm clear message.

S This completes the test.

S Inform the OMC-R of test completion.

GSM-209-423Battery check



68P02902W63-O

20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O i

Chapter 5

Decommissioning the equipment

GSM-209-423

20th Sep 02ii


68P02902W63-O

GSM-209-423

20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O iii





GSM-209-423

20th Sep 02iv


68P02902W63-O

GSM-209-423 Overview of decommissioning

20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O Inst. 5�1

Overview of decommissioning

Introduction

This chapter describes how to decommission a Horizonmicro2 orHorizoncompact2 enclosure and the Horizoncompact2 booster (this involves thecomplete removal of all equipment and cables from the site). To decommissionequipment not supplied by Motorola, for example E1 Links, power supplies andantenna, refer to the vendors instructions.

WARNING Hazardous voltages in excess of 240 V ac exist inside aHorizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 BTS enclosure with abooster unit.Under no circumstances should BTSs be packaged withthe battery pack attached. If the battery pack is damaged,the loose battery cells present a potential safety hazard.

Prerequisite

Read Chapter 1 of this category in order to acquire essential backgroundinformation before attempting to decommission a Horizonmicro2 orHorizoncompact2 enclosure.

GSM-209-423Decommissioning the BTS enclosure



68P02902W63-O

Decommissioning the BTS enclosure

Introduction

Use the following procedure to decommission a Horizonmicro2 orHorizoncompact2 BTS enclosure, and use the checklist to check off each actionas it is completed. Photocopy the checklist as often as required; do not write onthe original.

Before starting

Before starting to decommission a Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 BTSenclosure ensure that:

S The shipping container exists. Contact the Motorola local office for a newcontainer if the original shipping container has been disposed of.

S Correct packaging exists: cartons A, B, C, and if applicable, the fibre opticcarton. Contact the Motorola local office for new packaging if the originalcartons have been disposed of.

S The main ac power source is switched off and that NO power is connectedto the equipment.

WARNING Ensure that there is no risk of power being applied to theequipment during decommissioning. The ac power sourceshould be isolated and locked, and a warning labelattached.

S The carrying/lifting handles have been retrieved from storage.

GSM-209-423 Decommissioning the BTS enclosure

20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O Inst. 5�3

Procedure

To decommission a Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 BTS enclosure, carryout the procedures outlined below in sequence.

Preliminary actions

1. Check the enclosure for signs of damage.

2. Ensure that the ac supply is disconnected from the equipment at theisolator switch.

Solar cover removal

1. Remove the solar cover by following steps a and b.

Step Action

a. Release the two M5 security screws, clamping the solar cover tothe chassis, from bottom of the solar cover.

b. Pull the bottom of the solar cover away from the chassis, andupwards, until it is free from the chassis locating lugs.

2. Carefully pack the solar cover in carton B.

Battery/cover removal

1. Remove the battery/cover by following steps by following steps c and d.

Step Action

c. Release the two retaining screws and remove the battery/coverfrom the underside of the chassis.

d. If a battery is fitted, remove the blade fuse from the battery.

CAUTION Do not dispose of the battery.

2. Carefully pack the cover/battery and blade fuse in carton B.

WARNING Under no circumstances should BTSs be packaged withthe battery pack attached. If the battery pack is damaged,the loose battery cells present a potential safety hazard.

CAUTION The Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 enclosures usecircuitry which is sensitive to static discharge. Avoidhandling in a high-static environment. When handling thechassis, do not touch connector contacts. An earthedhigh-impedance wrist strap must be worn when handlingthe chassis with the bottom cover removed.




68P02902W63-O

Cable removal

1. Disconnect the ac input power cable, RF booster cables, E1/HDSL linksand earth strap/cable and, if applicable, fibre optical cables by using thefollowing table.

If it is... Then...

AC power Disconnect the socket from the PSM by releasingthe captive screw and pulling, using theconnector body.

Release the power cable from the cable clips andinsulate.

Booster cables(Horizoncompact2)

Disconnect the N-type antenna plug from theantenna connector mounted in the centre of thechassis.

E1/HDSL links Remove cable clamp components and disconnectthe connections from the DINO or RHINO.module:

a: If the module is a RHINO then release the Type 43 connectors.

b: If the module is a DINO then release the two retaining screws and remove the 9-way D-type connector.

c: Remove any HDSL connectors.

Safely detach the cable clamp from the cable,and store safely, then release the cable(s).

Alarm cable Disconnect the alarm cable socket and customerinterface assembly.

Earth strap Remove the nut, spring and plain washers anddisconnect the earth strap from the wall mountingbracket.

Wall bracket earth Disconnect the main earth cable from the wallbracket.

Fibre optic cables(if applicable)

Release the expansion cover and expansioncastings and disconnect the fibre optic cablesfrom the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2.Refit the expansion casting and expansion coverand repack the fibre optic cables in its carton.

WARNING Insulate and stow disconnected cables so that they do notconstitute a hazard to personnel using the site.

2. Ensure that all disconnected cables are clear of the enclosure.

3. If the power cable is not to be used again for another item of equipment,remove completely and dispose of safely.

GSM-209-423 Decommissioning the BTS enclosure

20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O Inst. 5�5

BTS chassis and wall bracket removal

1. Remove the BTS chassis by following steps e to h.

WARNING The BTS chassis can weigh up to 24 kg. Handle withextreme caution.

Step Action

e. Remove the short M8 bolt that secures the bottom of the chassisto the wall bracket.

f. Locate and fit the previously stored carrying/lifting handles to thesides/front of the chassis with six M6 screws.

g. Remove the two long M8 bolts that secure the top of the chassisto the top of the wall bracket.

h. Using the carrying/lifting handles, lift and pull the chassis awayfrom the wall bracket.

2. Carefully pack the chassis in carton C.

3. Remove the wall bracket by referring to the following table.

If it is ... Then ...

Wall mounted Holding the wall bracket and using a suitable tool,remove the four screws securing the wall bracket tothe wall.

Pole mounted Using suitable tools, cut and remove the lowerbucklestrap from the pole.Holding the wall bracket and using the aboveprocedure, remove the upper bucklestrap from thepole.

Remove the wall bracket from the pole. Remove thetwo C channels from the wall bracket.

Remove the two universal channel clamps from theC channels.

4. If fitted, remove the conduit termination bracket from both the conduits andwall bracket.

5. Carefully pack the wall bracket in carton A.

6. Carefully pack all security and fixing screws, nuts and washers, togetherwith the conduit termination bracket, two C channels, universal channelclamps and bucklestraps, in carton A.

7. Carefully pack cartons C, B and A in the shipping container. Seal thecontainer and return, as advised by the Motorola in-country ProjectManager.




68P02902W63-O

BTS checklistCopy this sheet and fill in the checklist in Table 5-1.

ENGINEER�S NAME __________________________________DATE _______

SIGNATURE ________________________________________

SITE NAME _________________________________________

EQUIPMENT TYPE ___________________________________

NAT ID _____________________________________________

Table 5-1 Checklist of completed decommissioning steps (BTS)

ACTION Yes No N/A

BTS enclosure decommissioned.

Packing material (including polythene bag) on site.

Is enclosure damaged? If yes detail in comments box.

Solar cover removed and packed.

Battery removed and packed.

AC power cable disconnected from ac-dc PSM.

DINO or RHINO cables disconnected.

Remote antenna disconnected (if fitted).

Chassis earth strap disconnected from wall bracket.

Main earth cable disconnected from wall bracket.

BTS chassis removed and packed.

Wall bracket removed and packed.

Wall bracket fixings removed and packed.

Conduit termination bracket (if fitted) removed andpacked.

All loose cables stowed and secured.

AC supply input isolated and source locked.

Fibre optic cables packed (if applicable).

COMMENTS

GSM-209-423 Decommissioning a booster

20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O Inst. 5�7

Decommissioning a booster

Introduction

Use the following procedure to decommission a booster and use the checklist tocheck off each action as it is completed. Photocopy the checklist as often asrequired; do not write on the original.

Before starting

Before starting to decommission a booster ensure that:

S The shipping container exists. Contact the Motorola local office for a newcontainer if the original shipping container has been disposed of.

S Correct packaging exists: cartons A, B and C. Contact the Motorola localoffice for new packaging if the original cartons have been disposed of.

S The main power source is switched off and that NO power is connected tothe booster.

WARNING Ensure that there is no risk of power being applied to theequipment during decommissioning. The ac power sourceshould be isolated and locked, and a warning labelattached.

S Sufficient packing cartons are available to pack the decommissionedequipment.

S The carrying/lifting handles have been retrieved from storage.

Procedure

To decommission a booster, carry out the procedures outlined below insequence:

Preliminary actions

1. Check the booster for signs of damage.

2. Ensure that the ac supply is disconnected from the booster at the isolatorswitch.

Solar cover removal

1. Remove the solar cover by following steps a and b.

Step Action

a. Release the two M5 security screws that clamp the solar boostercover to the chassis from the bottom of the solar cover.

b. Pull the bottom of the solar cover away from the chassis andupwards, until it is free from the chassis locating lugs.

2. Carefully pack the booster solar cover in carton B.

GSM-209-423Decommissioning a booster



68P02902W63-O

Cable removal

CAUTION A booster uses circuitry which is sensitive to staticdischarge. Avoid handling in a high static environment.When handling the chassis, do not touch connectorcontacts.

1. Disconnect the ac input power cable and earth strap/cable and then followthe steps given in the following table table.

To remove the... Then...

Security bracket Remove the screws and disconnect the clamp.

AC power andalarms cable clamp

Remove the screws and release the cable clamp.Release the cables and refit the cable clamp.

AC power Disconnect the socket from the PSM by releasingthe captive screw and pulling, using theconnector body.

Release the power cable from the cable clips.Insulate the cable.

Alarms cable Disconnect the alarms cable socket and insulate.

Antenna plugs Disconnect the antenna plugs ANT1 and ANT2from the sockets.

Tx and Rx plugs Disconnect the Tx and Rx plugs from the sockets.

Earth strap Remove the nut, spring and plain washers anddisconnect the earth strap from the wall mountingbracket.

Wall bracket earth Disconnect the main earth cable from the wallbracket.

WARNING Insulate and stow disconnected cables so that they do notconstitute a hazard to personnel using the site.

2. Ensure that all disconnected cables are clear of the booster.

3. If the power cable is not to be used again for another item of equipment,remove completely and dispose of safely.

GSM-209-423 Decommissioning a booster

20th Sep 02


68P02902W63-O Inst. 5�9

Booster chassis and wall bracket removal

WARNING The booster chassis can weight up to 20 kg (GSM900) or24 kg (DCS1800). Handle with extreme care.

1. Remove the four long M8 screws and washers securing the chassis to thewall bracket.

2. Using the same four screws and washers, locate and fit the previouslystored carrying/lifting handles to each side of the chassis.

3. Using the carrying/lifting handles lift and pull the chassis away from thewall bracket.

4. Carefully pack the chassis in carton C.

5. If wall bracket antennas are fitted, cut the cable ties and remove the cableassemblies.

6. Remove the wall bracket by referring to the following table.

If it is ... Then ...

Wall mounted Holding the wall bracket and using a suitable tool,remove the four screws securing the wall bracket tothe wall.

Pole mounted Using suitable tools, cut and remove the lowerbucklestrap from the pole.Holding the wall bracket and using the aboveprocedure, remove the upper bucklestrap from thepole.

Remove the wall bracket from the pole. Remove thetwo C channels from the wall bracket.

Remove the two universal channel clamps from theC channels.

7. Carefully pack the wall bracket in carton A.

8. Carefully pack all security and fixing screws, nuts, washers together withthe conduit termination bracket, two C channels, universal channel clampsand bucklestraps in carton A.

9. Carefully pack cartons A, B and C in the shipping container. Seal thecontainer and return, as advised by the Motorola in-country ProjectManager.

GSM-209-423Decommissioning a booster



68P02902W63-O

Boosterchecklist

Copy this sheet and fill in the checklist in Table 5-2.

ENGINEER�S NAME __________________________________DATE _______

SIGNATURE ________________________________________

SITE NAME _________________________________________

EQUIPMENT TYPE ___________________________________

NAT ID _____________________________________________

Table 5-2 Checklist of completed decommissioning steps (Booster)

ACTION Yes No N/A

Horizoncompact2 booster decommissioned.

Packing material (including polythene bag) on site.

Is enclosure damaged? If yes detail in comments box.

Booster solar cover removed and packed.

AC power cable disconnected from ac-dc PSM.

Antenna plugs removed.

Tx1, Tx2 and Rx plugs removed.

Alarm cable removed.

Chassis earth strap disconnected from wall bracket.

Main earth cable disconnected from wall bracket.

Security bracket removed and packed.

Booster chassis removed and packed.

Wall bracket removed and packed.

Wall bracket fixings removed and packed.

Conduit termination bracket (if fitted) removed andpacked.

All loose cables stowed and secured.

AC supply input isolated and source locked.

COMMENTS

CHAPTER 2ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

CHAPTER 3FAULT DIAGNOSIS AND

REPAIR

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION

20th Sep 02

Maintenance Information: Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2

68P02902W64-O i

Category 523

Maintenance Information (Maint.)

GSM-209-523

20th Sep 02ii


68P02902W64-O

GSM-209-523

20th Sep 02


68P02902W64-O iii

Category 523Maintenance Information (Maint.) i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 1General information i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to maintenance Maint. 1�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Recommended conditions and requirements Maint. 1�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In this chapter Maint. 1�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety Maint. 1�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



Chapter 2Routine maintenance i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Routine maintenance overview Maint. 2�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction to routine maintenance Maint. 2�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance procedures Maint. 2�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torque values Maint. 2�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .







GSM-209-523

20th Sep 02iv


68P02902W64-O









GSM-209-523

20th Sep 02


68P02902W64-O v




GSM-209-523

20th Sep 02vi


68P02902W64-O

20th Sep 02


68P02902W64-O i

Chapter 1

General information

GSM-209-523

20th Sep 02ii


68P02902W64-O

GSM-209-523

20th Sep 02


68P02902W64-O iii

Chapter 1General information i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction to maintenance Maint. 1�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recommended conditions and requirements Maint. 1�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In this chapter Maint. 1�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety Maint. 1�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



GSM-209-523

20th Sep 02iv


68P02902W64-O

GSM-209-523 Introduction to maintenance

20th Sep 02


68P02902W64-O Maint. 1�1

Introduction to maintenance

Recommendedconditions andrequirements

This chapter contains the recommended conditions and requirements thatshould be considered before any of the procedures included in this document,or referred to in other documents, are carried out on the Horizonmicro2 orHorizoncompact2 equipment.

In this chapter

The conditions and requirements to be considered are:

S Equipment access.

S Tools and materials.

S Torque values.

S Test equipment and leads.

Safety

Safety features are built into the equipment to protect against the potentiallylethal hazards that exist. All statements regarding safety within thesemaintenance procedures, and the preliminary pages of this manual, must beadhered to when working on the equipment.

GSM-209-523Equipment access

20th Sep 02Maint. 1�2


68P02902W64-O

Equipment access

Introduction toequipmentaccess

The following information describes the environmental requirements that shouldbe considered before attempting to gain access to the Horizonmicro2 orHorizoncompact2 equipment.

Environmentalrequirements

The environmental limits for equipment operation and maintenance activity aredefined in Technical Description: Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2(Category 323) of this service manual.

Maintenanceconditions

WARNING Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 equipment may behot to touch.

Maintenance procedures depend on the ambient conditions.

Access to Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 equipment in the open air mustnot be attempted during the following actual or imminent inclement weatherconditions:

S Winds in excess of 25 knots.

S Heavy persistent rain, snow, hail, or sleet.

S During an electrical storm.

Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 equipment may be accessed under thefollowing conditions:

S Wind speeds of less than 25 knots.

S No precipitation occurring or likely to occur during the maintenance period.

S When the temperature is between �40 _C to +50 _C.

Access to a wallmounted BTSand booster

A hydraulic lift/ladders must be used to gain access to the Horizonmicro2 orHorizoncompact2 for repair and routine maintenance.

GSM-209-523 Tools and materials

20th Sep 02


68P02902W64-O Maint. 1�3

Tools and materials

Introduction totools andmaterials

The following table lists the recommended tools and materials for carrying outthe procedures in this manual.

BTS andbooster tool kit

A recommended tool kit for the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 is listed inTable 1-1.

Table 1-1 Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 tool kit

Quantity Description

11111111111111111111

13 mm combination spanner.Screwdriver set, flats and posidrive.1/4 inch square drive.1/4 inch extension.1/4 inch to hex adapter.T10 bit.T25 tamperproof bit (supplied).T30 tamperproof bit (supplied).6 mm hex bit.Hammer drill plus masonry bits.Roll of insulation tape.Spirit level.Ratchet & sockets.Torque wrench.Ruler.Hammer.Pole mount banding tool (order number SWLN4847).Wire stripping tool.Crimping tool.Small hacksaw.

Cleaningequipment

The following cleaning materials and equipment are required for routinemaintenance:

S Soft brush.

S Dustpan.

S Mild detergent.

S De-ionised water

S Soft cloth.

GSM-209-523Tools and materials



68P02902W64-O

Torque values

The torque values listed in Table 1-2 are to be used when performingmaintenance on the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 equipment.

Table 1-2 Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 torque values

Item Size/Type Torque Where

Wall bracket (BTS and booster)

Chassis/wall bracket earthstud (BTS and booster)


Wall bracket/wall fixings Customer selection Field only

BTS conduit bracket M6 skt hd 3.4 Nm Factory & field

Booster conduit bracket M8 skt hd 10 Nm Factory & field

BTS chassis


Customer interface cover(clamp)Sealant cover

Strain relief clamp

M5 Torx

M5 Torx

M3 Torx

3.4 Nm

3.4 Nm

1.2 Nm

Field only

Field only

Field only

Battery/Battery cover M5 Torx 3.4 Nm Field only



Transport handle M6 Torx 3.4 Nm Factory & field

BTS cover


Booster chassis


Security bracket M8 skt hd 10 Nm Field only


Transport handle M8 skt hd 10 Nm Factory & field

Booster cover


Fibre optic expansion


Fibre cable M5 Torx 3.4 Nm Field only

20th Sep 02


68P02902W64-O i

Chapter 2

Routine maintenance

GSM-209-523

20th Sep 02ii


68P02902W64-O

GSM-209-523

20th Sep 02


68P02902W64-O iii

Chapter 2Routine maintenance i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Routine maintenance overview Maint. 2�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to routine maintenance Maint. 2�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance procedures Maint. 2�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torque values Maint. 2�1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .




GSM-209-523

20th Sep 02iv


68P02902W64-O

GSM-209-523 Routine maintenance overview

20th Sep 02


68P02902W64-O Maint. 2�1

Routine maintenance overview

Introduction toroutinemaintenance

This chapter provides the information required to perform the routinemaintenance on a Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 BTS enclosure andHorizoncompact2 booster.

NOTE Since the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 operate aspart of a network, the procedures in this manual must becarried out in conjunction with the relevant networkprocedures performed at the OMC-R.

Maintenanceprocedures

The Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 routine maintenance procedureswhich should be performed annually are:

S Checking fins and grilles.

S Checking bolts and nuts.

S Checking the solar cover(s).

S Checking paintwork.

S Checking the security of attachment.

Torque values

For torque values used during the performance of routine maintenance onHorizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 equipment, refer to Chapter 1, Tools andmaterials.

GSM-209-523Removing the BTS solar cover



68P02902W64-O

Removing the BTS solar cover

Introduction toremoving theBTS solar cover

This procedure describes how to remove the solar cover to gain access tointernal components, and how to refit it when maintenance has been completed.

WARNING Laser radiation from fibre optic cables within theHorizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 enclosure can causeeye damage. If fibre optic cables are fitted, ensure that allpower is turned OFF and the battery pack is removed.

CAUTION Refer to Equipment access in Chapter 1 for theconditions that must be considered before gaining accessto internal equipment.

Tools required

The tools specifically required for this procedure are:

S T25 tamperproof bit.

S Torque wrench.

Removing theBTS solar cover

To remove the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 solar cover:



CAUTION The solar cover is susceptible to damage. Avoid droppingor placing anything on top of it.


GSM-209-523 Removing the BTS solar cover

20th Sep 02


68P02902W64-O Maint. 2�3

Diagram of BTSenclosure andsolar cover

Figure 2-1 shows the removal of the solar cover from the chassis.

SOLAR COVERig.056.rh


Refitting theBTS solar cover

WARNING Laser radiation from fibre optic cables within theHorizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 enclosure can causeeye damage. If fibre optic cables are fitted, ensure that allpower is turned OFF and the battery pack is removed.

To refit the Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 BTS solar cover:

1. Position the solar cover over the chassis.

2. Lift the solar cover slightly above the top of the chassis, and aligned withthe sides of the rear cover.

3. Slightly angle the top of the solar cover, push towards the chassis anddownwards, until it is positioned on the chassis top locating lugs.

4. Ensure that the solar cover has located on the bottom securing lugs and isflush with the back cover.

5. Secure the solar cover to the chassis by tightening the two M5tamperproof screws evenly to the correct torque.

GSM-209-523Removing the booster solar cover



68P02902W64-O

Removing the booster solar cover

Introduction toremoving thebooster solarcover

This procedure describes how to remove the solar cover to gain access tointernal components, and how to refit it when maintenance has been completed.

NOTE Refer to Equipment access in Chapter 1 for theconditions that must be considered before gaining accessto internal equipment.

Tools required

The tools specifically required for this procedure are:


S Torque wrench.

GSM-209-523 Removing the booster solar cover

20th Sep 02


68P02902W64-O Maint. 2�5

Removing thebooster solarcover

To remove the booster solar cover:

1. Release the two M5 tamperproof screws that secure the solar cover to thechassis from the bottom of the solar cover.


CAUTION The solar cover is susceptible to damage. Avoid droppingor placing anything on it.


NOTE Inspect the solar cover. If it is damaged, a new covershould be ordered.

Figure 2-2 shows the location of the solar cover on the chassis.

KEY HOLEM5SCREW


SOLAR COVER

LOCATING LUG


ig.059.rh

Figure 2-2 Removing the booster solar cover (GSM900 version shown)

GSM-209-523Removing the booster solar cover



68P02902W64-O

Refitting thebooster solarcover

To fit the booster solar cover to the chassis:

1. Ensure that the two M5 tamperproof screws on the lower front coverbrackets of the booster are released to fit the security bracket key slothole, as shown in Figure 2-2.

2. Place the solar cover onto the booster mounting bolts by tilting the lowercover and pushing into the key hole position, then push forward to secure.

3. Securing the cover by tightening the M5 security screws evenly to thespecified torque.

GSM-209-523 Annual routine maintenance

20th Sep 02


68P02902W64-O Maint. 2�7

Annual routine maintenance

Maintenanceoverview

This section describes the annual routine maintenance procedures which shouldbe performed in the sequence given.

Cleaningequipment

Refer to Chapter 1 Tools and materials for details of the cleaning materialsrequired.

Maintenanceprocedure

Remove the BTS or booster solar cover as described earlier in this chapter, thenproceed as follows:

Fins and grilles

Use a soft brush and dustpan to remove all the dirt and debris from thefinned surfaces and grilles of the equipment.

Bolts and nuts

For all equipment, check all visible nuts, bolts, screws and connections forsecurity of attachment; refer to the torque tables in Chapter 1.

Solar covers

Clean the solar cover(s) using a leather cloth, mild detergent and water toremove any grease, salt or bird lime.

Paint

Check paintwork and repaint if necessary.

Security attachment

Check security attachment and repair if necessary.

Refit the solar cover(s).

Residual current device (RCD)

Check RCD to national and manufacturer recommended instructions.

GSM-209-523Annual routine maintenance



68P02902W64-O

20th Sep 02


68P02902W64-O i

Chapter 3

Fault diagnosis and repair

GSM-209-523

20th Sep 02ii


68P02902W64-O

GSM-209-523

20th Sep 02


68P02902W64-O iii











GSM-209-523

20th Sep 02iv


68P02902W64-O





GSM-209-523 Fault diagnosis

20th Sep 02


68P02902W64-O Maint. 3�1

Fault diagnosis

Reference tofault diagnosisinformation

There are no fault diagnosis procedures for the Horizonmicro2 or theHorizoncompact2 described in this service manual. Instead, reference should bemade to the following manuals:

S Maintenance Information: BSS Field Troubleshooting (GSM 100-523).

S Maintenance Information: Alarm Handling at the OMC-R (GSM 100-501).

GSM-209-523Overview of replacement procedures



68P02902W64-O

Overview of replacement procedures

Introduction torepair

This chapter provides the repair procedures for Horizonmicro2 andHorizoncompact2 equipment. The following procedures are described:

S Replacement of field replaceable units (FRUs).

S Calibration of the MCU-m GCLK.

FRU list

Horizonmicro2

The Horizonmicro2 FRUs are:

S BTS enclosure complete.

S BTS solar cover.

S Battery pack.

S Customer interface clamp.

S Wall/pole mounting brackets and fixings.

S Internal antenna.

S Fibre optic cables and connection covers (if applicable).

Horizoncompact2

The Horizoncompact2 FRUs are:

S BTS enclosure complete.

S BTS solar cover.

S Battery pack.

S Customer interface clamp.

S Horizoncompact2 booster unit complete.

S Horizoncompact2 booster solar cover.

S Cables (Horizoncompact2 BTS to Horizoncompact2 booster and wallbracket to antenna).

S Wall/pole mounting brackets and fixings.

S Fibre optic cables and connection covers (if applicable).

Torque values

Refer to Chapter 1 of this category for torque values used in the Horizonmicro2and Horizoncompact2 repair procedures.

GSM-209-523 Replacing the BTS enclosure

20th Sep 02


68P02902W64-O Maint. 3�3

Replacing the BTS enclosure

Introduction toreplacing a BTSenclosure

This procedure describes how to remove the Horizonmicro2 orHorizoncompact2 BTS and replace it with a new unit.


Tools required

The tools specifically required for these procedures are:

S Ratchet, with 1/4 inch socket.

S 6 mm hex bit.


S T10 bit.

S Extension 1/4 inch to hex adapter.

S Screwdriver.

S Hydraulic lift.

Removalprocedures

Before the equipment is removed from the bracket the following proceduresmust be performed:

S Solar cover removal.

S Battery disconnection.

S Cable disconnection.

GSM-209-523Replacing the BTS enclosure



68P02902W64-O

Solar coverremoval

WARNING Laser radiation from fibre optic cables within the BTSenclosure can cause eye damage. If fibre optic cables arefitted, ensure that all power is turned OFF and the batterypack is removed.

To remove the solar cover:

1. Carefully manoeuvre the cage of the hydraulic lift until it is adjacent to theBTS chassis.



CAUTION Avoid dropping or placing anything on top of the solarcover, as it is susceptible to damage.


Figure 3-1 shows the removal of the BTS solar cover from the chassis.

ig.056.rh



20th Sep 02


68P02902W64-O Maint. 3�5

Battery removalprocedure

To remove the bottom cover containing the battery:

WARNING Support the battery while removing the screws to avoidpersonnel being placed at risk when battery detaches fromthe chassis.

1. Release the two M5 captive screws that secure the battery cover to thebottom of the chassis.

2. Carefully remove the battery cover and battery (see also Replacing thebattery).

Cabledisconnection

With reference to Figure 3-2 and Figure 3-3, disconnect the following cables:

AC power

WARNING Ensure the ac power supply input has been safely isolatedso that there is no risk of power being applied to the cableduring this procedure. The source should be isolated andlocked, and a warning label attached.

Disconnect the ac power connector from the ac-dc PSM by releasing the centralscrew and pulling on the connector body.

External antenna (Horizonmicro2)

NOTE This procedure is not required if the Horizonmicro2 usesan internal antenna option.

Disconnect the N-type antenna plug from the antenna connector mounted onthe centre front right of the chassis (see Figure 3-2).

External antennas (Horizoncompact2)

Disconnect the N-type Rx and Tx plugs from their respective connectorsmounted at the centre front of the chassis (see Figure 3-3).

NOTE For fibre optic cable disconnection see Replacing theexpansion fibre optic cables.




68P02902W64-O

E1/HDSL link

Unscrew the clamp cover, cable clamp and clamp main body. Disconnect theconnections from the DINO or RHINO module using the following appropriateprocedure:

If the module is ... Then ...

RHINO Release the type T43 connectors.

Release the HDSL connector(s).

DINO (E1) Release the two retaining screws and remove the9-way D-type connector.Release the HDSL connector(s).

Store the clamp components safely for re-use.

NOTE If clamp seals are damaged, the clamp should bereplaced.

Alarms cable

Release the alarms cable (connecting with the booster unit) from the socket byunscrewing the plug (see Figure 3-3 for position).

Earth cable

Remove the nut, spring and plain washers and disconnect the earth cable fromthe wall mounting bracket.


20th Sep 02


68P02902W64-O Maint. 3�7

BTS cablepositionsdiagram

Horizonmicro2

Figure 3-2 shows the cable connections to the Horizonmicro2.


Rx/Tx1/Tx2 CABLECONNECTOR

(N-type)

DTRXMODULE


RDIS MODULE

FRONTVIEW

GASKET

AC INPUTCONNECTOR

NOT USED

NOTE: ENSURE SEALEDRIGHT ANGLED CONNECTORHUBER & SUHNER PART NO.

16N-50-3-33-133IP

Figure 3-2 View of front and bottom of Horizonmicro2 chassis, showing cableconnectors




68P02902W64-O

Horizoncompact2

Figure 3-3 shows the cable connections to the Horizoncompact2.

LINE TERMINATION MODULE(RHINO SHOWN)ALARMS CONNECTOR

FOR BOOSTER

Tx1 CABLECONNECTOR

MASTER(N-type)

DTRXMODULE


RDIS MODULE

FRONTVIEW

GASKET

AC INPUTCONNECTOR

NOTE: ENSURE SEALEDRIGHT ANGLED CONNECTORHUBER & SUHNER PART NO.

16N-50-3-33-133IP

Tx2 CABLECONNECTOR

SLAVE(N-type)

Rx CABLECONNECTOR

(N-type)

Figure 3-3 View of front and bottom of Horizoncompact2 chassis, showingcable connectors


20th Sep 02


68P02902W64-O Maint. 3�9

BTS enclosureremovalprocedure

The following procedure assumes that a hydraulic lift is to be used in thereplacement of a Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 chassis.

To remove the chassis:

NOTE It is assumed that the Removing the solar cover,Removing the battery and Cable disconnectionprocedures have been carried out.

1. Refit the handles (previously stored for the purpose of re-use).

2. Fit safety strap/lifting tackle to the cage and handle to ensure safety priorto removing bolts.

3. Remove the short M8 bolt and washers that secure the bottom of thechassis to the wall bracket.

4. Remove the two long M8 bolts and washers that secure the top of thechassis to the wall bracket.

WARNING A Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 can weigh up to28 kg. Handle with extreme care.

5. Using the carrying/lifting handle and supporting the weight of the chassis,lift and pull the chassis away from the wall bracket.

BTS enclosurereplacementprocedure

To replace a Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2, refer to the installationprocedures detailed in Category 423, Chapter 2 of this manual. In summary, thisinvolves:

S Unpacking the equipment.

S Installing the chassis.

S Connecting cables for earth, power, antenna, E1 links and alarms cable.

S Fitting the solar cover.

S Fitting battery/cover.

S Powering up the ac power supply.

GSM-209-523Replacing the BTS solar cover



68P02902W64-O

Replacing the BTS solar cover

Solar coverreplacementprocedure

WARNING To minimize RF exposure from the antenna, power to thetransceivers must be turned OFF while connections aremade to the BTS.Potentially lethal voltages of up to 240 V ac exist withinthe BTS enclosure when the ac isolator switch is ONand/or the battery is connected.Laser radiation from fibre optic cables within the BTSenclosure can cause eye damage. If fibre optic cables arefitted, ensure that all power is turned OFF and the batterypack is removed.

To replace the solar cover:

1. Release the two M5 tamperproof screws, clamping the solar cover to thechassis, from the bottom of the solar cover.

2. Pull the bottom of the solar cover away from the chassis and upwards,until it is free from the top chassis locating lugs (see Figure 3-4).

CAUTION The solar cover is susceptible to damage. Avoid droppingor placing anything on top of it.

3. Remove the solar cover and dispose of safely.

4. Fit the new solar cover onto the top chassis locating lugs.

5. Ensure the solar cover attaches onto bottom securing lugs.

6. Tighten the two M5 tamperproof screws to the bottom of the solar cover,applying the correct torque.

GSM-209-523 Replacing the BTS solar cover

20th Sep 02


68P02902W64-O Maint. 3�11

Solar coverattachmentdiagram

Figure 3-4 shows the solar cover attachment to the chassis.

ig.056.rh

Figure 3-4 BTS solar cover attachment to chassis

GSM-209-523Replacing the battery



68P02902W64-O

Replacing the battery

Batteryreplacementprocedure

WARNING To minimize RF exposure from the antenna, power to thetransceivers must be turned OFF while connections aremade to the BTS.

To replace the battery bottom cover and integral battery:

WARNING Support the battery while removing screws to avoidpersonnel being placed at risk when the battery detachesfrom the chassis.

1. Release the two M5 tamperproof screws from the bottom of the battery.

2. Carefully remove the battery bottom cover.

3. Unpack the new battery pack from its protective wrapping and inspect forany damage.

NOTE Ensure that the battery is fully charged before connectingto an operational system.Ensure a serviceable fuse is fitted to the battery.Using a clean, dry cloth, wipe the underside of the chassisto remove any excess moisture, and wipe any excessmoisture from the gasket seal around the underside of thechassis.

4. Insert the blade fuse into the holder on the top of the new battery pack.

5. Ensuring that the 2-pin connector is positioned at the left end of thechassis. Position the battery pack on the underside of the chassis (seeFigure 3-5).

6. Secure in place using the two M5 tamperproof screws and tighten to thecorrect torque.

GSM-209-523 Replacing the battery

20th Sep 02


68P02902W64-O Maint. 3�13

Batteryattachmentdiagram

Figure 3-5 shows the battery attachment to the chassis.

BATTERY/COVER

CABLEEXIT

CHANNEL

BLADEFUSE

Figure 3-5 Battery attachment to chassis

GSM-209-523Replacing customer interface clamp



68P02902W64-O

Replacing customer interface clamp

BTSconnectorslocationdiagram


J15 J16J14 J17 J13

DINO (E1/HDSL) RHINO (E1/HDSL)

J12J11

INTERNALSLAVE

INTERNALMASTER

HDSL OPTIONA B

TXRX

TXRX

PORT PIN1 & 6

2 & 73 & 84 & 9

PORT PINDINO LABEL

ALARMHDSL OPTION

INTERNAL SLAVE


A A B B

RHINO LABEL



ALARM

J13 J12

J3 (MMI)

J13 J12J17J16J15J14

J11

(USED ONHORIZONCOMPACT2 ONLY)

J12J13

Figure 3-6 Location of customer interface connectors

GSM-209-523 Replacing customer interface clamp

20th Sep 02


68P02902W64-O Maint. 3�15

Customerinterface clampdiagram

Figure 3-7 shows the clamp used to protect the E1/HDSL connectors.

STRAINRELIEFCLAMP

MAIN BRACKET (FITTO CHASSIS CASING)

SEALANTCOVER

EXTERNALCABLES IN

CABLES TO CHASSISCONNECTORS

CUSTOMERINTERFACE CLAMP

UNDERSIDE VIEW

Figure 3-7 Customer interface clamp used to protect E1/HDSL connectors

Clamp removalprocedure

WARNING To minimize RF exposure from the antenna, power to thetransceivers must be turned OFF while connections aremade to the BTS.Potentially lethal voltages of up to 240 V ac exist withinthe BTS enclosure when the ac isolator switch is ONand/or the battery is connected.

To remove the clamp to be replaced:

WARNING Support the battery while removing screws to avoidpersonnel being placed at risk when the battery detachesfrom the chassis.

1. Remove the battery/battery cover (see Replacing the battery).

2. Unscrew the sealant cover (four M5 screws).


4. Remove the main bracket from the chassis casing (four M5 screws).

5. Detach all connectors.

6. Remove the entire customer interface clamp from the cable and dispose ofsafely.

GSM-209-523Replacing customer interface clamp



68P02902W64-O

Clampreplacementprocedure

To connect the E1/HDSL link(s) and alarms cable with clamp:

1. Unpack the new clamp.

2. Unscrew the sealant cover (four M5 screws).


4. Feed the cables through the strain relief clamp and main bracket.

5. Attach the connectors as indicated by the following table:

If ... Then ...

T43 connectors Insert the Type 43 coaxial connectors into theappropriate sockets (J14, J15, J16, J17) on the RHINOmodule.

D-typeconnection

Insert the 9 pin D-type connector into socket J11 on theDINO module.

HDSLconnection

Insert the HDSL connector(s) into the appropriatesocket (J12 and/or J13) on the RHINO or DINO (E1)module.

Alarms cableconnection

Insert the alarms connector into the appropriate socketand screw in to secure.

The cable positions are as indicated in Figure 3-7.

6. Fit the main bracket to the chassis casing (four M5 screws) and tighten thescrews to the correct torque.

CAUTION Ensure the cable connectors are firmly in place and thatthe cables are clamped without affecting the connectors.

7. Tighten the strain relief clamp (seven M3 screws) to secure the clamp ontothe cables.

8. Fit the sealant cover (four M5 screws) and tighten the screws to thecorrect torque.

9. Refit the battery/battery cover (see Replacing the battery).

GSM-209-523 Replacing a booster

20th Sep 02


68P02902W64-O Maint. 3�17

Replacing a booster

Introduction toreplacing abooster

This procedure describes how to remove the Horizoncompact2 booster andreplace with a new unit.


Tools

The tools specifically required for these procedures are:

S Ratchet, with 1/4 inch socket.

S 6 mm hex bit.


S T10 bit.

S Extension 1/4 inch to hex adapter.

S Screwdriver.

S Torque wrench.

S Hydraulic lift.

Boosterremovalprocedures

Before the equipment is removed from the bracket the following proceduresmust be performed:

S Solar cover removal.

S Cable disconnection.

GSM-209-523Replacing a booster



68P02902W64-O

Solar coverremovalprocedure

To remove the solar cover:

1. Carefully manoeuvre the cage of the hydraulic lift until it is adjacent to thechassis.

2. From beneath the chassis, release the two M5 security screws that clampthe solar cover to the chassis.


Figure 3-8 shows the removal of the solar cover from the chassis.

KEY HOLEM5SCREW


SOLARCOVER

LOCATINGLUG


ig.059.rh

Figure 3-8 Removing the booster solar cover (GSM900 version shown)


20th Sep 02


68P02902W64-O Maint. 3�19

Boosterdisconnectionprocedure

With reference to Figure 3-9 (GSM900 version) or Figure 3-10 (DCS1800version), to disconnect a Horizoncompact2 booster:

WARNING Ensure the ac power supply input has been safely isolatedso that there is no risk of power being applied to the cableduring this procedure. The source should be isolated andlocked, and warning label attached.Ensure the RF output is prevented from entering thebooster from the Horizoncompact2 BTS.

1. Remove the screws and disconnect the security bracket.

2. Remove the screws securing the ac power and alarms cable clamp.

3. Disconnect the ac power socket from the power plug by releasing thecaptive screw and pulling, using the connector body. Release the powercable from the cable clips.

4. Disconnect the alarms cable socket.

5. Disconnect the N-type antenna plugs ANT1 and ANT2 from the sockets.

6. Disconnect the N-type Tx1, Tx2 and Rx plugs from the sockets.

7. Remove the nut and plain washers and disconnect the earth strap fromthe wall mounting bracket.

8. Disconnect the main earth cable from the wall bracket.

WARNING Stow disconnected cables so they do not create a hazardto personnel using the site.




68P02902W64-O

GSM900booster cablelocationsdiagram

Figure 3-9 shows the location of the cables to be removed.


SCREWDRIVER

KEY HOLESLOT

SECURITYBRACKET

KEY HOLESLOT

TX2

ANT2RX

ALARMSCONNECTORTX1

AC POWER SOCKET

ANT1


Figure 3-9 View of front and bottom of chassis, showing cable connectors


20th Sep 02


68P02902W64-O Maint. 3�21

DCS1800booster cablelocationsdiagram

Figure 3-10 shows the location of the cables to be removed.

SECURITYBRACKET

SCREWDRIVER

TX1

ANT2

ANT1

AC POWERSOCKETTX2

RX

ALARMS CONNECTOR


KEY HOLESLOT

KEY HOLESLOT


Figure 3-10 View of front and bottom of chassis, detailing cable connectors




68P02902W64-O

Boosterremovalprocedure

The following procedure assumes that a hydraulic lift is to be used in thereplacement of a Horizoncompact2 booster.

To remove the chassis:

NOTE It is assumed that the Removing the solar cover andRemoving the Cable disconnection procedures havebeen carried out.

1. Remove the four M8 bolt and washers that secure the chassis to the wallbracket.

2. Using the same four M8 bolts and washers, refit the handles (previouslystored for the purpose of reuse).

3. Fit the safety strap/lifting tackle to the cage and handle to ensure safetyprior to removing the bolts.

WARNING A booster can weigh up to 20 kg (GSM900) or 24 kg(DCS1800). Handle with extreme care.

4. Using the carrying/lifting handle and, supporting the weight of the chassis,lift and pull away from the wall bracket.


20th Sep 02


68P02902W64-O Maint. 3�23

Boosterremovaldiagram

Figure 3-11 shows the booster removal details.




GSM900VERSION

DCS1800VERSION




Figure 3-11 Removing the Horizoncompact2 booster

NOTE The M8 bolts and washers removed from the mountingwall bracket are used to secure the handles to theHorizoncompact2 booster unit.




68P02902W64-O

Boosterreplacement

To replace a Horizoncompact2 booster, refer to the installation proceduresdetailed in Category 423, Chapter 2 of this manual. In summary, this involves:

S Unpacking the equipment.

S Installing the chassis.

S Connecting cables for earth, power, antenna, Rx and Txs.

S Fitting the security bracket.

S Fitting the solar cover.

S Powering up the ac power supply.

GSM-209-523 Replacing the booster solar cover

20th Sep 02


68P02902W64-O Maint. 3�25

Replacing the booster solar cover

Solar coverreplacementprocedure

To fit the Horizoncompact2 booster solar cover to the chassis:

1. Ensure that the two M5 tamperproof screws on the lower front coverbrackets of the booster are released to fit the security bracket key holeslot, as shown in Figure 3-12 and Figure 2-2.

2. Place the solar cover onto the Horizoncompact2 booster mounting boltsby tilting the lower cover and pushing into the keyhole position, then pushforward to secure.

3. Secure the cover by tightening the M5 security screws evenly to thespecified torque.

Figure 3-12 shows the Horizoncompact2 booster solar cover being mountedonto the chassis.

KEY HOLEM5SCREW

SOLARCOVER

LOCATINGLUG


ig.059.rh


Figure 3-12 Installing the solar cover (GSM900 version shown)

GSM-209-523Replacing Horizonmicro2 antenna cables



68P02902W64-O

Replacing Horizonmicro2 antenna cables

Introduction toreplacementprocedures

This section describes the following Horizonmicro2 procedures:

S Replacing the external antenna cable.

S Replacing an internal antenna.

Externalantenna cableremovalprocedure

To remove an external antenna cable:

WARNING Ensure the ac power supply input has been safely isolatedso that there is no risk of power being applied to the cableduring this procedure. The source should be isolated andlocked and a warning label attached.

1. Remove the Horizonmicro2 solar cover, as described in Replacing solarcover.

2. Remove the N-type connector, unscrewing by hand.

Externalantenna cablereplacementprocedure

To connect a new antenna cable:

1. Attach the N-type antenna connector, screwing by hand until firmly inplace.

2. Refit the Horizonmicro2 solar cover, as described in Replacing solarcover.

GSM-209-523 Replacing Horizonmicro2 antenna cables

20th Sep 02


68P02902W64-O Maint. 3�27

Internal antennaremovalprocedure

To remove the internal antenna from the Horizonmicro2 BTS:

WARNING To minimise RF exposure from the antenna, power to thetransceivers must be turned OFF, while connections aremade to the Horizonmicro2.Potentially lethal voltages, up to 360 V dc and 240 V acexist within the Horizonmicro2 enclosure when the acsupply isolator switch is ON and/or the battery isconnected.

1. Ensure power to the unit has been turned off, and batteries run down, orsafe procedure for transceiver shut down achieved. Figure 3-13 shows aninternal antenna fitted to the chassis (back chassis cover not shown forclarity).

2. Remove the solar cover, as described in Replacing BTS solar cover.

3. Remove the four M5 Torx screws.

4. Detach the antenna from the chassis.

5. Remove the N-type connector, unscrewing by hand.

6. Dispose of the antenna safely.

Internal antennareplacementprocedure

To refit a new antenna:

1. Attach the N-type antenna connector, screwing by hand until firmly inplace.

2. Locate the antenna in the correct position.

3. Fit four M5 Torx screws and tighten to the correct torque.

4. Refit the solar cover, as described in Replacing BTS solar cover.

GSM-209-523Replacing Horizonmicro2 antenna cables



68P02902W64-O

Internal antennalocationdiagram

Figure 3-13 shows an Horizonmicro2 BTS internal antenna.

INTERNALANTENNA

Figure 3-13 Internal antenna attached to chassis on Horizonmicro2 BTS

GSM-209-523 Replacing Horizoncompact2 antenna cables

20th Sep 02


68P02902W64-O Maint. 3�29

Replacing Horizoncompact2 antenna cables

Introduction toreplacementprocedures

This section describes the following Horizonmicro2 procedures:

S Replacing the Rx, Tx1 and Tx2 cables.

S Replacing the booster ANT1 and ANT2 cables.

Removing theRx,Tx1 and Tx2cables

To remove the Rx, Tx1 and Tx2 cables:

WARNING Ensure the ac power supply input has been safely isolatedso that there is no risk of power being applied to the cableduring this procedure. The source should be isolated andlocked and a warning label attached.Ensure the RF output is prevented from entering thebooster from the Horizoncompact2.

1. Remove the Horizoncompact2 BTS solar cover (see Removing the solarcover earlier in this chapter).

2. Remove the Horizoncompact2 booster solar cover (see Removing thebooster solar cover earlier in this chapter).

3. Remove the Horizoncompact2 booster security bracket.

4. Undo the RF N-type cables.

Replacing theRx,Tx1 and Tx2cables

To replace the Rx, Tx1 and Tx2 cables:

1. Fit the new RF cables.

2. Refit the Horizoncompact2 booster security bracket.

3. Refit the Horizoncompact2 booster solar cover.

4. Refit the Horizoncompact2 BTS solar cover.

GSM-209-523Replacing Horizoncompact2 antenna cables



68P02902W64-O

Removing theANT1 and ANT2cables

To remove the booster ANT1 and ANT2 cables:

WARNING Ensure the ac power supply input has been safely isolatedso that there is no risk of power being applied to the cableduring this procedure. The source should be isolated andlocked and a warning label attached.Ensure the RF output is prevented from entering thebooster from the Horizoncompact2.

1. Remove the Horizoncompact2 booster solar cover (see Removing thesolar cover earlier in this chapter).

2. Remove the Horizoncompact2 booster security bracket.

3. Undo the RF N-type cables.

4. Remove ac power cable and alarm cable (this will also involve removingthe cable clamp).

5. Remove the ANT1 and ANT2 cables

Replacing theANT1 and ANT2cables

To replace the booster ANT1 and ANT2 cables:

1. Fit the new ANT1 and ANT2 cables

2. Refit the RF cables.

3. Refit the ac power cable and alarm cable (this will also involve refitting thecable clamp).

4. Refit the Horizoncompact2 booster security bracket.

5. Refit the Horizoncompact2 booster solar cover.

GSM-209-523 Replacing the alarm cable

20th Sep 02


68P02902W64-O Maint. 3�31

Replacing the alarm cableThis procedure describes the removal and replacement of the Horizonmicro2and Horizoncompact2 alarm cable.

Removing thealarm cable

To remove the alarm cable:

1. Remove the booster solar cover (see Removing the solar cover earlier inthis chapter).

2. Remove the booster security bracket.

3. Remove the booster cable clamp.

4. Remove the alarm cable.

Replacing thealarm cable

To replace the alarm cable:

1. Fit the new alarm cable.

2. Refit the booster cable clamp.

3. Refit the booster security bracket.

4. Refit the booster solar cover.

GSM-209-523Replacing the expansion fibre optic cables



68P02902W64-O

Replacing the expansion fibre optic cables

Introduction tofibre opticreplacement

This procedure provides instructions for replacing the fibre optic cables whichlink up a master base transceiver station (BTS) to either one slave BTS (fourcarrier BTS site) or two slave BTSs (six carrier BTS site).



S Ratchet with 1/4 inch socket, to fit a tamperproof T25 tool bit.

S Torque wrench.

WARNING To minimize RF exposure from the antenna, power to thetransceivers must be turned OFF while connections aremade to the BTS.Potentially lethal voltages of up to 240 V ac exist withinthe BTS enclosure when the ac mains isolator switch isON and/or the battery is connected.Laser radiation from fibre optic cables within the BTSenclosure can cause eye damage. Ensure that all power isturned OFF and the battery pack is removed.

GSM-209-523 Replacing the expansion fibre optic cables

20th Sep 02


68P02902W64-O Maint. 3�33

Fibre opticconnections

Figure 3-14 shows the master and slave BTS interconnections.

PORT 1

PORT 1

PORT 2

SLAVE 1 BTS

SLAVE 2 BTS

MASTER BTS

PORT 1

Figure 3-14 Connecting master and slave BTSs




68P02902W64-O

Fibre opticcable removalprocedure

To remove the fibre optic cables (see also Figure 3-15):

WARNING To minimize exposure to RF from the antenna, power tothe transceivers must be turned OFF while connectionsare made to the BTS.Potentially lethal voltages, up to 240 V ac exist within theBTS enclosure when the ac supply isolator switch is ONand/or the battery is connected.Laser radiation from fibre optic cables within the BTSenclosure can cause eye damage. Ensure that all power isturned OFF and the battery pack is removed.

1. Remove the BTSs solar covers as described earlier in Replacing the BTSenclosure.

2. Remove the retaining pin(s) from the expansion cover(s) and push back torelease. Retain the pin(s) for later use.

3. On the master BTS, remove the four M5 screws securing the expansioncasting and put them in a safe place.

4. Release the master BTS expansion casting and unplug the fibre opticcable(s).


5. On the slave BTS, remove the four M5 screws securing the expansioncasting and put them in a safe place.

6. Release the slave BTS expansion casting and unplug the fibre optic cable.



20th Sep 02


68P02902W64-O Maint. 3�35

Fibre opticcablereplacementprocedure

To replace the fibre optic cables (see also Figure 3-15):

Master BTS procedure

WARNING To minimize RF exposure from the antenna, power to thetransceivers must be turned OFF while connections aremade to the BTS.Potentially lethal voltages of up to 240 V ac exist withinthe BTS enclosure when the ac supply isolator switch isON and/or the battery is connected.Laser radiation from fibre optic cables can cause eyedamage. Ensure that all power is turned OFF and thebattery pack is removed.

1. Locate the four optical fibre plugs on the expansion casting into the foursockets on the master BTS. The sockets have a plastic guide plate toensure correct alignment. Secure the expansion casting to the BTS withfour screws and tighten to 3.4 Nm torque.

NOTE On early versions, remove the fibre protection caps beforeconnection.The plastic guide fitted in the BTS(s) to ensure correctalignment of the fibre connectors may not be present �take care to fit the connectors correctly.

2. Connect the fibre optic link cable to the first slave BTS to port 1 on themaster BTS (the connector is a bayonet type). Insert the plug into thesocket and turn to lock into position.

3. Connect the fibre optic link cable to the second slave BTS (if fitted) to port2 on the master BTS.


5. Replace the solar cover as described in Replacing the BTS solar cover.




68P02902W64-O

Slave BTS procedure

WARNING To minimize RF exposure from the antenna, power to thetransceivers must be turned OFF while connections aremade to the BTS.Potentially lethal voltages of up to 240 V ac exist withinthe BTS enclosure when the ac supply isolator switch isON and/or the battery is connected.Laser radiation from fibre optic cables can cause eyedamage. Ensure that all power is turned OFF and thebattery pack is removed.

1. Locate the four optical fibre plugs on the expansion casting into the foursockets on the slave BTS(s). The sockets have a plastic guide plate toensure correct alignment. Secure the expansion casting to the BTS withfour screws and tighten to 3.4 Nm torque.


2. Connect the fibre optic link cable to the master BTS to port 1 on the slaveBTS.


4. Replace the solar covers as described in Replacing the BTS solar cover.


20th Sep 02


68P02902W64-O Maint. 3�37

Expansioncover andcasting

Figure 3-15 shows fibre optic expansion casting and cover.

PORT 2

PORT 1

Tx1

Rx1

Rx2

Tx2

Figure 3-15 Fibre optic expansion casting and cover

GSM-209-523Calibrating an MCU-m GCLK



68P02902W64-O

Calibrating an MCU-m GCLK

Introduction tocalibration

This section describes the procedure to calibrate the Horizonmicro2 orHorizoncompact2 MCU-m GCLK. The Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 mayrequire this procedure to be carried out once or twice in the life of theequipment. The GCLK has been factory set, and only needs calibration in thefield when an OMC-R alarm indicates the requirement.

Calibrate all test leads before using them in the procedures given in this chapter.This minimizes variations in test results.

CAUTION A recognized laboratory must calibrate all test equipmentannually. Do not calibrate test equipment or test leads inthe field.Ensure that all test equipment associated with thecommissioning of Motorola BTSs is within calibration date.

Test equipmentrequired

Table 3-1 shows the required test equipment.

Table 3-1 Required GCLK test equipment

Quantity Description Comments

1 Any TTY terminal. The basic requirements are:

S TFT screen.

S Serial port.

S Battery power.

S Any terminal software can beused for TTYcommunications.

1 Rubidium standard. Minimum accuracy 1 x 10�10.

1 Frequency counter. 1.25 ppb (parts per billion) or betterreference. 10-digit display required.

1 Commercial terminal emulatorsoftware.

PC PLUS or similar software.

1 9-way to 9-way D-type cable. MCU TTY cable.

This cable can be assembled (seeFigure 3-16 for pin connections).Alternatively, the cable can bepurchased from an electronicsstore).

1 9-way to 9-way connectorand breakout board, includingshorting links (jumper cables).Kit number SWLN7898.

Motorola supply for GCLKcalibration.

GSM-209-523 Calibrating an MCU-m GCLK

20th Sep 02


68P02902W64-O Maint. 3�39

TTY cables andpin connections

This section describes the PC RS-232 connector and test TTY cables requiredfor the calibration procedure.

PC RS-232 TTY connections

The RS-232 TTY connections on a PC is usually a male D9 connector with thepin connections as shown in Table 3-2.

Table 3-2 D9 pin connections

Pin Number Signal name

1 DCD (Data Carrier Detect)

2 RXD (Received Data)

3 TXD (Transmitted Data)

4 DTR (Data Terminal Ready)

5 GND (Earth)

6 DSR (Data Set Ready)

7 RTS (Request To Send)

8 CTS (Clear To Send)

9 RI (Ring Indicator)




68P02902W64-O

Test TTY cable pin connections

The pin connections for the TTY cable mentioned in Table 3-1 are shown inFigure 3-16.

PIN NUMBER

9-WAY D-TYPE F 9-WAY D-TYPE M

PIN NUMBER

4 m LONG SCREENED CABLETO PC

COMMUNICATIONS PORTTO BREAKOUT BOARD

CONNECTOR

2

3

5

4

6

7

8

3

2

5

Figure 3-16 9-way to 9-way cable test cable connections

Usually, only a 3-wire interface connecting RXD, TXD and GND is required.However, some PC applications will require two extra shorting connections to bemade at the PC connector only. These two connections are pin 4 to pin 6, andpin 7 to pin 8.


20th Sep 02


68P02902W64-O Maint. 3�41

Crossed and uncrossed TTY cables

Instead of making up the TTY cable, crossed and uncrossed TTY cables can bepurchased from an electronics store. In the uncrossed position, the TTY cable ismade with the signals on pins 2 and 3 not crossed (pin 2 maps to pin 2, pin 3maps to pin 3). In the crossed position, the TTY cable is made with the signalson pins 2 and 3 crossed (pin 2 maps to pin 3, pin 3 maps to pin 2).

Figure 3-17 shows the connections for both crossed and uncrossed TTY cables.

1

2

3

4

5

1

2

3

4

5

1

2

3

4

5

1

2

3

4

5

UNCROSSED CABLE

CROSSED CABLE

FEMALE PLUGSINTO PC

Figure 3-17 Crossed and uncrossed TTY cables

Figure 3-18 shows a breakout board with TTY connectors. Next to eachconnector on the breakout board is a 10 pin header. By moving two shortinglinks (jumper cables) from one end to the other, the connector can be changedfrom an uncrossed connection to a crossed connection.




68P02902W64-O

Safetyprecautions

Ensure that the following safety precautions are performed prior to calibration.

WARNING Power to the transceivers must be turned OFF whileconnections are made to the BTS to minimize exposure toRF radiation.Potentially lethal voltages exist within the BTS enclosurewhen the ac isolator switch is ON and/or the battery isconnected.Laser radiation from fibre optic cables within the BTSenclosure can cause eye damage. If fibre optic cables arefitted, ensure that all power is turned OFF and the batterypack is removed.

1. Ensure power to the unit has been turned off and the batteries run down,or the safe procedure for transceiver shut down has been achieved.

2. Remove the battery/battery cover, observing normal handling safetyprecautions.

Procedure forMCU-m GCLKcalibration

NOTE Next to each connector on the breakout board(Figure 3-18) is a 10-pin header. By moving two shortinglinks (jumper cables) from one end to other, the connectorcan be changed from an uncrossed connection to acrossed connection.

CAUTION An approved earth strap (high impedance) must be wornat all times when calibrating the MCU-m GCLK. The earthstrap 4 mm jack plug must be connected to the ESPsocket on the underside of the BTS.

Proceed as follows to calibrate the MCU-m GCLK:

1. Attach the 9-way test cable to the breakout board (see Figure 3-18) and tothe 9-way connector labelled ALARM on the bottom of the Horizonmicro2or Horizoncompact2 (see Figure 3-19).

2. Attach the MCU TTY cable to the PC.

3. Attach the other end of the MCU TTY cable to the connector on thebreakout board marked SYNC. Press the RETURN (or ENTER) key on thekeyboard for the prompt. The sync TTY prompt SYNC-MMI> should appear.

4. Connect the frequency counter to the 8 kHz (REF 125 ms) BNC connectoron the breakout board.

5. Attach a 10 MHz reference signal from the rubidium standard to the 10 MHz BNC input connector on the frequency counter. Ensure thecounter is set for external reference and triggers correctly on the 8 kHzinput. Adjust the counter to display at least ten digits.


20th Sep 02


68P02902W64-O Maint. 3�43

6. Allow 15 minutes for the MCU-m to warm up, or the OCXO will not bestable.

7. Type:

SYNC-MMI>dcal

8000Hz source Connected, Enter ’y’ when ready, ’a’ to abort test>y

The frequency measured will be approximately (but not exactly) 8000.00000 Hz.

8. Adjust the OCXO control voltage by typing:+3...+2...+1...+0...–0...–1...–2...–3 until the frequency is exactly8000.00000 Hz.

Enter ’a’ to abort, ’s’ to save, ’+[0..3]’ to inc, –[0..3] to dec>+2



NOTE These numbers as entered relate to orders of magnitude.For example, typing +3 causes an increase ten timesbigger than that caused by typing +2. The entries +0 and�0 are both valid.

9. When the ref_125 ms frequency is exactly 8000.00000 Hz, specify save asfollows:

Enter ’a’ to abort, ’s’ to save, ’+[0..3]’ to inc, –[0..3] to dec>s

The calibration program sets the output frequencies to various different valuesand now requests that you type in the values of the output frequency at variouspoints:

Dac set to 1.0 volts, Enter Freq value or ’a’ to abort>7999.99673







Calibration Gain 0.37345 RETURN

SYNC–MMI>

This ends the calibration procedure.




68P02902W64-O

Diagram ofbreakout board

The breakout board is shown in Figure 3-18.

SYNCPROCESSOR

TTYCONNECTOR

9600 BAUD

DINO/RHINO(NIU) TTY

CONNECTOR9600 BAUD

REF 125 mS BNC CONNECTOR

9-WAYCONNECTOR

UNCROSSEDCABLE POSITION

JUMPER CABLE LINKS INCROSSED CABLE

POSITION

LINKS IN

10-PIN HEADER

JUMPER CABLE

8 kH

z

HORIZON 2 ALARMSBREAKOUT BOARD8486145V01 ISS P20

Figure 3-18 Horizonmicro2 or Horizoncompact2 breakout board


20th Sep 02


68P02902W64-O Maint. 3�45

Breakout boardconnectionpoint

Figure 3-19 shows the connection point on the BTS for the breakout board.

LINE TERMINATIONMODULE (RHINO SHOWN)

ALARMS CONNECTORBREAKOUT BOARDCONNECTS HERE

Figure 3-19 Underside of BTS showing breakout board connection point

Restoring thesite

Proceed as follows to restore the site:

1. Shut down the transceivers or turn off the ac supply.

WARNING Transceivers must be turned off to prevent a RF hazard.

2. Disconnect the calibration equipment.

3. Replace the battery/battery cover.

4. Restore power to the BTS.




68P02902W64-O

CHAPTER 1 OPTIONS AND SPARES

20th Sep 02

Parts Information: Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2

68P02902W65-O i

Category 623

Parts Information (Parts)

GSM-209-623

20th Sep 02ii


68P02902W65-O

GSM-209-623

20th Sep 02


68P02902W65-O iii

Category 623Parts Information (Parts) i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .




GSM-209-623

20th Sep 02iv


68P02902W65-O

20th Sep 02


68P02902W65-O i

Chapter 1

Options and spares

GSM-209-623

20th Sep 02ii


68P02902W65-O

GSM-209-623

20th Sep 02


68P02902W65-O iii




GSM-209-623

20th Sep 02iv


68P02902W65-O

GSM-209-623 Options

20th Sep 02


68P02902W65-O Parts 1�1

Options

Introduction tooptions

Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 GSM900 and DCS1800 equipment isordered by factory fitted configuration options and field fitted options.

Factory fittedBTS options

The Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 factory fitted configuration optionscomprise enclosure type and interface type.

Figure 1-1 shows the range of factory fitted options.

E1 DINO/RHINOBOARD

HORIZONCOMPACT2 BTSENCLOSURE

HORIZONMICRO2 BTSENCLOSURE

OR

Figure 1-1 BTS factory fitted options

GSM-209-623Options

20th Sep 02Parts 1�2


68P02902W65-O

Order and partnumbers

NOTE Each order number includes the interface type and BTStype.

Horizonmicro2 interfaces

Table 1-1 lists the Horizonmicro2 configuration options.

Table 1-1 Horizonmicro2 factory ordered configurations

Version Configuration (includingenclosure and solar cover

(front))

Order number withPCMCIA option

GSM900 E1 (75 ohm) (RHINO) with HDSL SWUF6517

E1 (120 ohm) (DINO) with HDSL SWUF6518

DCS1800 E1 (75 ohm) (RHINO) with HDSL SWUG6538

E1 (120 ohm) (DINO) with HDSL SWUG6539

NOTE The HDSL is not fitted on equipment manufactured after31st December 2001.

Horizoncompact2 interfaces

Table 1-2 lists the Horizoncompact2 configuration options.

Table 1-2 Horizoncompact2 factory ordered configurations


(front))


GSM900 E1 (75 ohm) (RHINO) with HDSL SWUF6528

E1 (120 ohm) (DINO) with HDSL SWUF6529

DCS1800 E1 (75 ohm) (RHINO) with HDSL SWUG6548

E1 (120 ohm) (DINO) with HDSL SWUG6549


GSM-209-623 Options

20th Sep 02


68P02902W65-O Parts 1�3

Field fittedequipmentoptions

The Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 field fitted configuration optionscomprise internal antenna (Horizonmicro2 only) and expansion kits. The polemount banding tool is also included in this section.

Figure 1-2 shows the available field fitted options and pole mount banding tool.

INTERNAL ANTENNA(HORIZONMICRO2 ONLY)

POLE MOUNTBANDING TOOL

HORIZONMICRO2 ORHORIZONCOMPACT2 BTS

FIBRE OPTICEXPANSION KIT

Figure 1-2 Field fitted BTS options and pole mount tool

GSM-209-623Options



68P02902W65-O

Order and partnumbers

Table 1-3 lists the order and part numbers.

Table 1-3 Field fitted options and pole mount banding tool

Item Ordernumber

Partnumber

Horizonmicro2 GSM900 internal antenna SWAF3237 8504808N03

Horizonmicro2 DCS1800 internal antenna SWAG3238 8504808N04

Pole mount banding tool SWLN4847 6604809N01

Expansion kits

Table 1-4 lists the order numbers for the fibre optic cable kit lengths.

Table 1-4 Field fitted options fibre optic expansion kits

Item Ordernumber

Partnumber

Horizonmicro2/compact2 expansion kit 2 m SWLN6441 N/A








Horizonmicro2/compact2 expansion kit asspecified (except range 700 to 800 m)

SWLN6568 N/A

GSM-209-623 BTS and booster spares

20th Sep 02


68P02902W65-O Parts 1�5

BTS and booster spares

Introduction tospares

This section list the spares available for the Horizonmicro2 BTS andHorizoncompact2 BTS and booster.

Figure 1-3 shows the range of Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 spares.

MOUNTINGBRACKET

BATTERY

CUSTOMERINTERFACE KIT

(CLAMP)POLE MOUNT

BANDING TOOL

COMPLETED POLEMOUNTING OF WALL

BRACKET

HORIZONMICRO2 BTS ORHORIZONCOMPACT2 BTS

ENCLOSURE

ig.058.rh

SOLARCOVER

Figure 1-3 BTS spares

GSM-209-623BTS and booster spares



68P02902W65-O

BTS order andpart numbers

NOTE Each order number includes the interface type and BTStype.

Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 common spares

Table 1-5 lists the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 order and part numbers.

Table 1-5 Common spares

Item Order number Part number

Battery 22 V, 20 A (blade type) fuse 6504929D01

Solar cover (front) SWLN5775 1586937N01

Customer interface kit (cover plates,gel seal, foam gasket) (CLAMP)

SWLN5774 0188330M01

Installation kit (wall and pole mountingbracket and fixings)

SWLN5240 0786402E01

Pole mount banding tool SWLN4847 6604809N01

GLCK calibration kit SWLN7898 �

AC connector SWLN8387A 0986065W01

Horizoncompact2 spares

Table 1-6 lists the spares equipment specific to Horizoncompact2.

Table 1-6 Horizoncompact2 factory ordered configurations


(front))


GSM900 E1 (75 ohm) (RHINO) with HDSL SWLF6558

E1 (120 ohm) (DINO) with HDSL SWLF6559

DCS1800 E1 (75 ohm) (RHINO) with HDSL SWLG6577

E1 (120 ohm) (DINO) with HDSL SWLG6578



20th Sep 02


68P02902W65-O Parts 1�7

Booster orderand partnumbers

Figure 1-4 shows the Horizoncompact2 booster and solar cover.

ig.059.rh

Figure 1-4 Horizoncompact2 booster




68P02902W65-O

Table 1-7 lists the Horizoncompact2 GSM900 booster spares.

Table 1-7 GSM900 booster spares


Horizoncompact2 booster GSM900(no install/kit cover)

SWLN6614 0186784M01


SWLN6612 0186789M01


Cable kit SWLN6622

Alarm cable 3086777M01

RF cable TX1 BTS to booster 3086781M01

RF cable TX2 BTS to booster 3086781M02

RF cable RX BTS to booster 3086781M03

Antenna cable (2 off) 3086782M01


Table 1-8 lists the Horizoncompact2 DCS1800 booster spares.

Table 1-8 DCS1800 booster spares


Horizoncompact2 booster DCS1800(no install/kit cover)

SWLN6174 0186331N01


SWLN6172 0186324N01


Cable kit SWLN7002

Alarm cable 3086777M01

RF cable TX1 BTS to booster 3086326N01

RF cable TX2 BTS to booster 3086326N02

RF cable RX BTS to booster 3086326N03

Antenna cable (ANT 1) 3086327N01

Antenna cable (ANT 2) 3086327N02



20th Sep 02


68P02902W65-O Parts 1�9

Labels

The labels attached to the Horizonmicro2 and Horizoncompact2 equipment areimportant for safety reasons. Any missing or damaged labels must be replaced.

The information provided here enables correct identification of the labels forreplacement ordering purposes.

Horizonmicro2 BTS labels

Figure 1-5 shows the location of labels on the Horizonmicro2 BTS. Refer toTable 1-9 for a description of the labels and part numbers.

ig.081.rh

1

2

3 4

5

6

7

Figure 1-5 Horizonmicro2 BTS labelling




68P02902W65-O

Table 1-9 explains the label numbering used in Figure 1-5.

Table 1-9 Horizonmicro2 labelling

No. Description Part No. Comments

1 Warning 5486132V01 Software codes. Dust covers foroptical fibre cable sockets. Laserradiation risk.

2 Information 5486381N02 Identifies transceiver extensionsockets.

3 System identity 5486980E01 By access panel. Also ESDidentifier.

4 Label on DINOorLabel on RHINO

5486794M01

5486795M01

On lower part of LineTermination Module.

5 GSM900 label DTRXorDCS1800 label DTRX

5486699V01

5486699V04

On lower right corner of DTRXcover panel. Ratings and safetydetails.

6 Caution 5402102W01 To the right of the Tx/Rx cableconnector.

7 Battery specification 5486924E01 On battery.


20th Sep 02


68P02902W65-O Parts 1�11

Horizoncompact2 BTS labels

Figure 1-6 shows the location of labels on the Horizoncompact2 BTS. Refer toTable 1-10 for a description of the labels and part numbers.

1

2

3

4 5

6

ig.081.rh

7

8

Figure 1-6 Horizoncompact2 BTS labelling




68P02902W65-O


Table 1-10 Horizoncompact2 labelling


1 Warning 5486132V01 Software codes. Dust covers foroptical fibre cable sockets. Laserradiation risk.

2 Information 5486381N02 Identifies the fibre opticextension sockets.

3 GSM900: Tx1, Tx2and RxDCS1800: Tx1, Tx2and Rx

5486382N01

5486382N02Beneath 3 N-type connectors onDTRX cover panel.

4 System identity 5486980E01 By access panel. Also ESDidentifier.

5 Label on DINOorLabel on RHINO

5486794M01

5486795M01

On lower part of LineTermination Module.

6 GSM900 label DTRXorDCS1800 label DTRX

5486699V02

5486699V05

On lower right corner of DTRXcover panel. Ratings and safetydetails.

7 Caution 5402102W01 To the right of the Rx cableconnector.

8 Battery specification 5486924E01 On battery.


20th Sep 02


68P02902W65-O Parts 1�13

Horizoncompact2 booster labelsFigure 1-7 shows the location of labels on both Horizoncompact2 boosters.Refer to Table 1-11 for a description of the labels and part numbers.

3

1

TX2ANT2RXANT1 TX1

2

4

CONNECTION IDENTITY LABEL

1

3

4

2

TX1ANT2RX ANT1TX2

CONNECTION IDENTITY LABEL

GSM900 BOOSTER

DCS1800 BOOSTER

Figure 1-7 Horizoncompact2 booster labelling




68P02902W65-O


Table 1-11 Horizoncompact2 booster labelling


GSM900 booster

1 Rating and identitylabel

5486699V01 Inside cover.

2 Connection identitylabel

5486783M01 Underside cover.

3 Caution ionizingradiation label

5402102W01 Inside cover.

4 Hazardous materialslabel

n/a Inside cover.

DCS1800 booster

1 Rating and identitylabel

5486699V06 Inside cover.

2 Connection identitylabel

5486328N01 Underside cover.

3 Caution ionizingradiation label

5402102W01 Inside cover.

4 Hazardous materialslabel

n/a Inside cover.

20th Sep 02


68P02902W61-O

GMR-01 I�1

Index

GSM-209-020

20th Sep 02 I�2


GMR-0168P02902W61-O

GSM-209-020

20th Sep 02


68P02902W61-O

GMR-01 I�3

A

AC isolator, Inst. 1�51connecting cables, Inst. 1�58

AC supplypower connector, Tech. 3�4, Inst. 1�54power connector (booster), Inst. 1�61schematic diagram (booster), Inst. 1�60

AC�DC BPSM, Tech. 3�11block diagram, Tech. 3�12interfaces, Tech. 3�13

AC�DC PSMblock diagram, Tech. 3�6interfaces, Tech. 3�7

Alarm cable, replacement procedure, Maint.3�31

AlarmsHorizoncompact2 booster, Tech. 5�20power supply, Tech. 3�8

Antenna, cabling to booster, Inst. 2�26

Antenna cable replacementHorizoncompact2, Maint. 3�29Horizonmicro2, Maint. 3�26

Antennas, Tech. 7�4

B

Batteryinstallation, Inst. 2�24replacement, Maint. 3�12specification, Tech. 1�6

Battery backup, Tech. 3�9

Battery check, Inst. 4�9

Battery test, Inst. 4�9

Boosterantenna cable connections, Inst. 2�32antenna cabling, Inst. 2�26block diagram, Tech. 5�18connecting ac supply cable, Inst. 2�35connecting cables, Inst. 2�29DCS1800, Tech. 2�5functional description, Tech. 5�18GSM900, Tech. 2�4package contents, Inst. 1�16power supply connections, Tech. 3�10removal diagram, Maint. 3�23replacement, Maint. 3�17solar cover replacement, Maint. 3�25supplementary earth connection, Inst. 2�31system description, Tech. 5�17

Booster solar coverrefitting, Maint. 2�6removal, Maint. 2�4

BPSM, Tech. 5�19

Breakout board, Maint. 3�44

BTS, package contents, Inst. 1�13

Bypass mode, Tech. 5�19

CCalibration, GCLK, MCU�m, Maint. 3�38

Clamp, replacement, Maint. 3�14

Clamping tool, Inst. 1�43, Inst. 1�50

Combiner/isolator, Tech. 5�12

Commissioning, power up procedure, Inst. 4�5

Configurations, BTS, Tech. 7�3

Connectorslocation diagram (BTS), Maint. 3�14location diagrams (booster), Maint. 3�20

Cooling, Tech. 6�1airflow diagram, Tech. 6�4booster, Tech. 6�5heatsinks, Tech. 6�3

Customer interface clampfitting, Inst. 2�21maintenance, Maint. 3�15

DDCS1800, frequency band, Tech. 1�9

GSM-209-020

20th Sep 02 I�4


GMR-0168P02902W61-O

Decommissioningbooster, Inst. 5�7BTS, Inst. 5�2

Dimensions, Tech. 1�5, Inst. 1�4

DINO, Tech. 4�8block diagram, Tech. 4�10connector details, Inst. 2�19connectors, Tech. 4�15

DINO/RHINO, Tech. 4�1

DTRX module, Tech. 5�3Rx functional block diagram, Tech. 5�7Rx/Tx interconnections, Tech. 5�13Tx functional block diagram, Tech. 5�10

Dual band support, Tech. 7�2

Duplexer, Tech. 5�12

EE1, link connection to BSC, Tech. 4�17

E1/HDSL link connections, Inst. 1�68

Earthingbooster, Inst. 1�12booster wall bracket, Inst. 1�62BTS, Inst. 1�11connecting site main earth, Inst. 1�59connecting supplementary earth cable, Inst.

1�66site, Inst. 1�10wall bracket, Inst. 1�55

ExpansionBTS configuration, Inst. 3�2configuration diagrams, Inst. 3�3dual band support, Tech. 7�2system, Tech. 7�1

FFault diagnosis, Maint. 3�1

Fibre optic cables, replacement, Maint. 3�32

Fibre optics, expansion connections, Inst. 3�8

Field Replaceable Units (FRUs), Maint. 3�2

Frequency hopping, Tech. 1�2

Fuse, battery pack, Tech. 3�9

GGCLK

calibrating, MCU�m, Maint. 3�38calibration procedure, Maint. 3�42

GSM900, frequency band, Tech. 1�9

HHDSL, Tech. 4�1

cabling guidelines, Inst. 1�71functional description, Tech. 4�14link options, Tech. 4�16

HDSL interface, Tech. 4�13

HDSL modems, Inst. 1�6

Heater, circuit block diagram, Tech. 6�2

Heater mats, Tech. 6�2

Horizoncompact2, external view, Tech. 1�4

Horizonmicro2, external view, Tech. 1�3

IInstallation

battery, Inst. 2�24booster cable connections, Inst. 2�18booster packaging, Inst. 2�6booster wall bracket, Inst. 1�44BTS cable connections, Inst. 2�12BTS onto wall bracket, Inst. 2�10cable conduits, Inst. 1�56Chassis, unpacking, Inst. 2�7clearances, Inst. 1�7HDSL cables, Inst. 1�72layout examples, Inst. 1�22mounting guidelines, Inst. 1�20BTS packaging, Inst. 2�4procedures, Inst. 1�1site requirements, Inst. 1�4tools required, Inst. 1�2wall bracket, Inst. 1�37

Isolator, Horizoncompact2, Tech. 5�14

LLabels, Parts 1�9

Lightning protection, Inst. 1�10

Line termination modules, Tech. 4�1

GSM-209-020

20th Sep 02


68P02902W61-O

GMR-01 I�5

MMaintenance

access conditions, Maint. 1�2annual, Maint. 2�7routine, Maint. 2�1

Maintenance cover, Inst. 1�9

MCU�m, Tech. 4�2block diagram, Tech. 4�3

Memory Management Unit (MMU), Tech. 4�2

MMI interface, Tech. 4�5

Modem, connection to BSC, Tech. 4�18

Module identification, Tech. 2�2, Tech. 2�3

OOptions, factory fitted, Parts 1�1

ORAC, Tech. 4�6block diagram, Tech. 4�7

PPart numbers

booster, Parts 1�7BTS, Parts 1�6BTS options, Parts 1�2

PCMCIA interface, Tech. 4�4

Powerconsumption, Tech. 1�6requirements, Tech. 1�6, Inst. 1�5

Power cables, requirements, Inst. 1�51

Power supplyac�dc PSM, Tech. 3�5booster, Tech. 3�10component diagram, Tech. 3�1distribution board, Tech. 3�2module diagram, Tech. 3�3

PSM, connector voltages, Tech. 3�2

QQUICC32 processor, Tech. 4�3

RRadio signalling links (RSLs), Tech. 4�13

RDIS, Tech. 4�1

Replacement, BTS enclosure, Maint. 3�3

Reset switches, DINO/RHINO, Tech. 4�12

RF, output power, Tech. 1�7

RF connectors, Inst. 1�67

RF modules, location diagram, Tech. 5�2

RHINO, Tech. 4�8block diagram, Tech. 4�10connector details, Inst. 2�19connectors, Tech. 4�15

Rx, Tech. 4�16

SSafety, on�site, Inst. 1�8

Security bracket, installation, Inst. 2�37

Site ID, Tech. 4�5

Software, expansion requirement, Tech. 7�4,Inst. 1�6

Solar coverinstallation, Inst. 2�23installation on booster, Inst. 2�41refitting, Maint. 2�3removal, Maint. 2�2replacement, Maint. 3�10

Spares, BTS and booster, Parts 1�5

Specifications, Tech. 1�5

Sync block, Tech. 4�4

TTemperature detectors, DTRX, Tech. 5�11

Tools, for installation, Inst. 1�2

Torque settings, Inst. 1�3, Inst. 2�2, Maint. 1�4

Tx, Tech. 4�16

UUnpacking, BTS, Inst. 1�15

GSM-209-020

20th Sep 02 I�6


GMR-0168P02902W61-O

WWall bracket, installation, Inst. 1�37

Weight, Tech. 1�5, Inst. 1�4equipment and packaging, Inst. 1�1

Horizon

Documents

68p02902w61o gmr page

horizoncompact2 68p02902w61o

manual number

manual revisiongmr

property of motorola

68p02902w61o i gmr

manual revision sheet

horizoncompact2 e motorola